JP7238920B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a winning lottery for special symbols based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole, and a winning lottery for normal symbols based on the passage of a game ball through a through gate. be. In such a gaming machine, a determination value for performing a winning lottery for special symbols is acquired based on the winning of a game ball into a starting hole, and a winning lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the passing of a game ball through a through gate. Some acquire judgment values for

JP 2012-010910 A

However, in such a game machine, there is a risk that the control processing will become complicated .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine capable of executing suitable control processing .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises first generation means for updating and generating a first judgment value with a value within a first range, and a second judgment value with a value within a second range. , a control means capable of repeatedly executing a game control process, and an interrupt capable of executing an interrupt process by interrupting the game control process based on a predetermined trigger and a interrupting means, wherein the interrupting means, as one process of the interrupt processing, is performed by the first generating means and the second generating means, respectively, based on the establishment of the first condition. When it is determined that the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition means for acquiring the first determination value and the second determination value and the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition means is the specific first determination value and a first control means for executing the first control, and as one process of the interrupt process executed after the first acquisition means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition , a second acquisition means for acquiring the first determination value and the second determination value newly updated by the first generation means and the second generation means, respectively; and second control means for executing a second control different from the first control when it is determined that the second determination value is the specific second determination value, wherein the gaming machine obtains a first storage area in which the first judgment value and the second judgment value can be temporarily stored; Information corresponding to the first determination value or the second determination value stored in the first storage area for determining the first determination value or the second determination value can be stored until determination is made. and a second storage area, wherein the first determination value is newly obtained after the first determination value or the second determination value is stored in the first storage area. and the second determination value are stored, the first determination value stored before the first determination value and the second determination value are newly stored in the first storage area, and The information corresponding to the second determination value is not stored in the first storage area, and the first determination value is determined based on the establishment of the second condition. and means for updating a counter value when the second determination value is acquired and the corresponding information is stored in the second storage area, and the counter value is a specific value , to execute a predetermined notification It is possible to

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first generation means for updating and generating the first determination value with a value within the first range, and the second determination value by updating and generating the second determination value with a value within the second range control means capable of repeatedly executing game control processing; and interrupting means capable of executing interrupt processing by interrupting the game control processing based on a predetermined trigger. and the interrupt means generates the first determination value by the first generating means and the second generating means as one process of the interrupt processing based on the establishment of the first condition. and the second determination value, and when the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit is determined to be the specific first determination value, the first control is performed As one process of the interrupt process executed after the first acquisition means based on the first control means to be executed and the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, a second obtaining means for obtaining the newly updated first judgment value and the second judgment value respectively by the means and the second generating means; and the second judgment value acquired by the second acquisition means. and second control means for executing a second control different from the first control when it is determined that the second determination value is the specific second determination value, the gaming machine comprising: the obtained first determination a first storage area in which a value and the second determination value can be temporarily stored; a second storage area in which information corresponding to the first determination value or the second determination value stored in the first storage area for determining the second determination value can be stored until determination is made; and after the first determination value or the second determination value is stored in the first storage area, the newly acquired first determination value and the second determination After the values are stored, the first determination value and the second determination value stored before the first determination value and the second determination value are newly stored in the first storage area. and the information corresponding to is not stored in the first storage area, and the first determination value and the second determination are determined based on the establishment of the second condition. It has means for updating a counter value when a value is acquired and the corresponding information is stored in the second storage area, and when the counter value is a specific value, a predetermined capable of executing a predetermined notification is .

As a result, there is an effect that suitable control processing can be executed .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and the big hit determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the first It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special design, and (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal design. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for big win, (c) FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a failure (normal) variation pattern table, and FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the announcement effect table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the big win announcement effect selection table, and (c) is FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a forewarning effect selection table for failure; 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface C. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the announcement production|presentation selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing advance notice reselection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. 4 is a flow chart showing an announcement effect command process executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern table for big wins in the second embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a (normal) variation pattern table for winning in the second embodiment. FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table in the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting prize-winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the main reselection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing main processing 2 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing main processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing wait progress effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a third embodiment; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a third embodiment; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the production|presentation counter initial value table in 3rd Embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; 13 is a flow chart showing main processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing announcement effect selection processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing re-acquisition processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 4 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 4 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 5 executed by an MPU in a main control unit in a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing winning processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a modification of the fourth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a fifth embodiment; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a fifth embodiment; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the super reach selection table in the fifth embodiment FIG. 11(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the super reach selection table for jackpot in the fifth embodiment, and (d) is the super reach selection table for losing in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a pseudo-fluctuation complementary effect selection table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the jackpot complementary effect selection table in the fifth embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the complementary effect selection table for failure in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing 6 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 6 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing variable reselection processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to be described later is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Various effects such as variable effects and ready-to-reach effects that are performed when a ball enters the first ball hole 64 (starting winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the themes given to each stage. It is The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. ”→“Island stage”→“City stage”→…. Also, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to the "town stage".

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the normal ready-to-win effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is being displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first A ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball receiving port 64, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and screwed from the front side of the game board 13 by wood screws. etc. is fixed. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a lottery for a special pattern (first pattern) is performed, and the ball passes through the through gate (also referred to as the second ball entrance) 67. In that case, a lottery for a normal design (second design) is performed. In the lottery for the special pattern performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special pattern is a jackpot is determined, and when it is determined that the special pattern is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot. is also determined. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls are won). ) is opened and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot type of the special pattern, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the special game state is finished, as an added value after the jackpot is finished, a game in accordance with these jackpot types is provided. (game value) is given to the player.

Also, when the lottery for the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, A special symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed in the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and is also shown by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is performed and the variable display according to the lottery. is started. The specific prize winning opening 65 a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first ball entry opening 64 . Therefore, during the special game state, since the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, many balls enter the first ball entering hole 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of held balls for the first ball entrance 64 becomes maximum (4 times).

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, a determination of whether or not the normal symbol hits is performed. When the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. become a state. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37. It is also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. be.

As described above, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as the jackpot types of special symbols.

When "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state (16R jackpot) of 16 rounds, and an added value is given after the jackpot is finished. More specifically, in the "jackpot A", as an added value after the jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern high probability state (while the special patterns are changing) from after the jackpot to the next jackpot. Along with shifting to, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal pattern. On the other hand, in the "jackpot B", as an added value after the jackpot is finished, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the time-saving state of the normal pattern during the period after the jackpot is finished until the lottery of the special pattern is finished 100 times.

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, a so-called special symbol probability change state (during special symbol probability change), in other words, a special game state (16R jackpot ). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, the ``time saving state of normal symbols'' (during time saving of normal symbols) refers to a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64. - 特許庁On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal design", it is called "normal state of normal design". indicates

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state (that is, after the end of "jackpot A"), the probability variation state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of times may be limited. Specifically, for example, after the special game state is completed, a special symbol probability changing state (high probability state) is provided until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times, and after the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times. may be configured to be set to a low probability state of special symbols. In addition, the number of times that the special symbol is in the variable probability state is not limited to 10 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be in a short time state of normal symbols until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times after the end of "jackpot B", but the short time period of normal symbols is 100 times. It is not limited and may be determined arbitrarily.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or the variation of the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. , the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates the big win type (big win A, big win B) in the case of a big win. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using this as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 12.1-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Further, if it is a "jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. and Ds3 are areas for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character appears. A notice effect is performed by putting out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is up to four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol performed with the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, or after the variation is completed. As a stop symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by the lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable display is provided in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 is achieved. The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64, the maximum number of balls held through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be three times or less, or five times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular special prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 7(a). As shown in FIG. 7(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A) is a data table that stores a big winning determination value of a first winning random number counter C1, which will be described later. Specifically, as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, only "0" is defined, and as the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (variable state) of the special symbol, 10 of "0 to 9" Judgment values are specified. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the starting winning match with one of the judgment values defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(a)), the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 8(b)) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 63" in association with "jackpot A". In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "64 to 127" in association with "jackpot B". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 8(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 20" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal symbols (see FIG. 8(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 212" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see FIG. 8(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to. It is determined whether there is

The variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 9A to 9D) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described later together with the explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 27). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in synchronization with the timing of passage through any of the through gates 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 255). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 255, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 255. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 26).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol reserved ball in the RAM 203 is updated. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (FIG. 8A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is equal to the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table, it is determined as the big win of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 127). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 127 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 127). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol is reserved in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a deviation from the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 255. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the probability of special symbols is low, there is one random number that becomes a jackpot of special symbols. It is stored (see FIG. 8(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values of 256, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/256".

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 10 random numbers that will be the jackpot of special symbols, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for high probability ( See FIG. 8(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 10 among the total number of random numbers of 256, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "10/256".

Further, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-128. Then, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the jackpot type is "jackpot A" when the random number is "0 to 63" in the first hit type counter C2. Also, when the value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 127, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach out of front and back" (for example, 125 to 127) that stops at the same time, and "Reach other than front and rear out" (for example, range of 116 to 124) in which the final stop symbol stops at a place other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected, such as "completely out of range" (for example, the range of 0 to 115) that does not generate reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. Stored in area 203a.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is "0 to 115", so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. table is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear deviating reach" is narrowed to 125 to 127, and the "non-front-rear deviating reach" is also narrowed to 116-124, making it difficult to select "front-rear deviating reach" or "fore-rear deviating reach". In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 101 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front and back" is widened to 102 to 124, making it easier for "Reach other than front and back" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 125-127.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 256, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 256). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 9(a)) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 9(a) to 9(c). As shown in FIG. 9(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a large winning variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 9(b)) and a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 9(c)). and a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 9(d)) are set at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 9(b), the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 9(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbols is a large winning. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 63" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "64 to 223" is associated with various super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern, and the range of "224 to 255" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Selection is made from the big hit variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for failure. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 101" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "102 to 127", it is out reach. Set (front-to-back out-of-reach reach, front-to-back out-of-reach reach).

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, either a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long failure (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. "0 to 127" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "128 to 255" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, there are various types of normal reach (30 seconds) that are out of the range of "0 to 191", and various types of super reach that are out of range of "192 to 254". (60 seconds), but "255" is set to a different special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 9(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. This loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 115" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined , "116 to 127", the out-of-reach reach (front-rear out-of-reach reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach reach) is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 255, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 255). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right through gate 67, and is stored in the RAM 203. is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 8(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set. , When matching with the value of the random number set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for when the probability of normal patterns is low (period in which normal patterns are normal), and when the probability of winning normal patterns is high than that of low probability (normal patterns) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 8(c), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 20". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 16 out of the total number of 256 random numbers, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/16".

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal pattern, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained and the normal pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83 as a variable display. is run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the first ball entrance 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. , the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 212". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big win is 208 out of the total number of 256 random numbers, so the probability that the special symbol will be a big win is "1/1.2".

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal pattern, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83 while the normal pattern is variable. is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 212", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the first ball entrance 64 is displayed "1 second x 2 times". ” will be released. In this way, when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the time of the variable display is extremely shortened from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of the normal pattern is low, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the first ball entrance 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 255), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 27).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. Various flags, counters, and the like are stored in the RAM 203 . Details of the RAM 203 will now be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a variable It has at least a flag 203e, a counter 203f during time saving, a jackpot flag 203g, a counter buffer 203y, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first per random number counter. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1-C3 is obtained according to the starting winning, the jackpot lottery of the original special symbols is immediately performed. Separately, from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3, various information obtained when the original lottery is conducted is predicted (estimated). In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) Prediction is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the success/failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information to store the special symbols 1 or 1 in the RAM 233. Of the special symbols 2, the corresponding special symbols are stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. , predict various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize. It should be noted that this prediction (prefetch) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the game state (normal game state or probability variable game state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . As a result, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbols corresponding to the starting prize.

Like the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Among the areas in which the data is stored, the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the data into a reserved area with an area number that is one smaller. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. are added (see S404 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 20).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 20 and S405 in FIG. 22). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the holding ball of the variable display held by the main controller 110 You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203d counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( (see S604 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 23).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S603 in FIG. 24: No ).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the variable probability flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The probability variable flag 203e is set to off by an initial value, and is set to on when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) in the jackpot control process (S1015 in FIG. 28). reference). Then, in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21), it is referred to determine whether or not the game state is a variable probability state (see S302 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started. It is set (see S214 in FIG. 20).

Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 21, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 21, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the value is ON, a special symbol lottery is drawn based on the first per random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the variable probability flag 203e is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first winning random number table 202a for low probability.

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern time saving state, and when the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern time saving state. If the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols. This short time counter 203f is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B (16R time short jackpot) (see S1014 in FIG. 28). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not it is during the time saving in the normal symbol variation process (see S508, S514, S519 in FIG. 23), and in the special symbol variation process, it is subtracted by 1 each time the variation time elapses. (See S217 in FIG. 20). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process, even if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, when the probability variation flag 203e described above is ON, the pachinko machine 10 is normally determined as the time saving state of the symbol (S508 in FIG. 23 , S514 and S519). As a result, after the end of the big win A, the variable probability state of the special symbols and the short working time state of the normal symbols can be maintained until the next big win, which is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, since the game can be played with the goal of achieving a jackpot A as one goal, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The jackpot flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the value of the jackpot flag 203g is ON, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that the jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203g is set to ON at the same time as the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1003 in FIG. 28) when the jackpot is determined by the lottery of the special symbols. Moreover, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1016 in FIG. 28). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), this big win flag 203g is referenced to determine whether or not the big win is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 20).

The counter buffer 203y stores the above-described counters (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, fluctuation type counter CS1, second winning random number counter C4 , and the second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 27) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 26) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the production random number generation IC 800, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 10(a). The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an advance notice effect selection table 222b.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The advance notice effect selection table 222b2 is a table for selecting the form of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display. Here, the advance notice effect in the present embodiment specifically means that the degree of expectation is suggested according to the type of character displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. Shows the production for As a character, one of three types may be selected. Specifically, a boy character (see Ds2 in FIG. 4), an old man character (not shown), and a girl character (not shown) are selected.

The juvenile character is more likely to be selected when the special symbol lottery is lost than other characters, and is less likely to be selected when the character wins a big hit. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize that the expectation of a big win is low compared to when another character is displayed in the small area Ds2 during the variable display.

On the other hand, girl characters are less likely to be selected when the special symbol lottery is lost than other characters, and are more likely to be selected when they win the jackpot. get higher Therefore, by displaying the girl character in the small area Ds2 during the variable display, the player can expect a big win.

In addition, the elderly character is configured to have a higher selection rate than the girl character and a lower selection rate than the boy character when the character is out. In addition, in the case of a big win, the ratio of selection is higher than that of boy characters, and the ratio of selection is lower than that of girl characters. As a result, compared to the case where the boy character is displayed, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for the big win. In this way, by varying the type of announcement effect (the character to be displayed) depending on whether or not a big win will occur, the degree of expectation for the big win can be predicted from the announcement effect. That is, before the third symbol is stop-displayed, the lottery result of the special symbol can be predicted from the contents of the notice effect, so that the game of the player is prevented from becoming monotonous during execution of the variable display. can (suppress) Note that the type of advance notice effect is not limited to the type of character displayed in the small area Ds2, and may be determined arbitrarily. For example, a notice effect of changing the back image may be executed, or a notice effect of changing the aspect (for example, size, color, etc.) of the changing third pattern may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 11, the announcement effect selection table 222b defines at least a big hit announcement effect selection table 222b1 and a win announcement effect selection table 222b2. The big win notice effect table 222b1 is a data table for selecting the form of the notice effect to be executed in the variable display executed when the special symbol lottery is a big win, and the lose notice effect selection table 222b2 is a special symbol. This is a data table for selecting the aspect of the advance notice performance to be executed in the variable performance executed when the lottery is lost.

First, with reference to FIG. 11(b), the big win announcement effect selection table 222b1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11(b), the jackpot for notice effect table 222b1 defines the form of the foretell effect to be executed for each value of the random number for effect. Although the details will be described later, the effect random number is a random number generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 . That is, the effect random number generation IC 800 can generate a random 8-bit numerical value (0 to 255) as a effect random number.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), the advance notice effect A is associated with the effect random number value in the range of "0 to 24". The notice effect A is a notice effect in which a boy character is displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4(b)). Since the ratio of winning is low, by selecting the advance notice performance A in the big win variation, it is possible to give a sense of surprise to the big win in spite of the notice performance with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

An advance notice effect B is associated with the value of the random number for effect in the range of “25 to 99”. The advance notice effect B is a notice effect in which an old man's character is displayed, and as described above, is configured to be selected at a higher rate than the notice effect A in the case of variable display for a big win. Therefore, when the advance notice effect B is displayed, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for the big win. In addition, an advance notice effect C is associated with the value of the random number for effect in the range of “100 to 249”. This advance notice effect C is a notice effect in which a girl character is displayed, and is the type of notice effect that is most likely to be selected in the case of a big win. Therefore, by displaying the advance notice effect C, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for the big win.

On the other hand, the value of the effect random number in the range of "250 to 255" is associated with "reselection". This "re-selection" means re-executing the selection of the advance notice effect. That is, when the value of the random number for effect is in the range of "250 to 255", the random number for effect is acquired again from the random number generation IC 800 for effect without determining the type of the advance notice effect (the random number for effect is regenerated). get). Then, the reacquired effect random number and the jackpot effect selection table 222b1 are referred to. This "reselection" is repeatedly executed until the value of the effect random number becomes a value (0 to 249) corresponding to any of the advance notice effect types. That is, when the value of the random number for effect acquired from the random number generating IC 800 for effect is "250 to 255", "reselection" is repeatedly executed.

By associating reselection with the range of "250 to 255", the advance notice effect is determined only when 250 random numbers for effect of "0 to 249" are obtained. For this reason, the advance notice effect A is selected when any of the 25 values of "0 to 249" out of the 250 values of "0 to 249" has a probability of 10% (25/ 250). In addition, since the advance notice effect B is selected when any of the 75 values "25 to 99" out of the 250 values "0 to 249" is reached, the probability is 30% (75 /250). In addition, since the advance notice effect C is selected when one of the 150 values "100 to 249" out of the 250 values "0 to 249" is reached, the probability is 60% (150 /250).

As described above, in the present embodiment, 250 values among the 8-bit (256 ways) values that can be generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 are used to select the advance notice effect. That is, the values of the number (that is, 250) that are well separated in decimal numbers can be used to determine the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to set the probabilities of each advance notice effect being selected to well-defined values (10%, 30%, 60%) (probability percentages (percentages) are converted into integers). This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability that each advance notice effect will be selected. Also, the developer who designs the probabilities of the advance notice effects can more easily set the probabilities.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11(c), the out-of-game announcement effect selection table 222b2 will be described. The winning notice effect selection table 222b2 is a data table in which the form of the notice effect to be executed is defined for each value of the effect random number, similarly to the winning notice effect selection table 222b1.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), the effect random number range of "0 to 149" is associated with the advance notice effect A, and the effect random number value of the range "150 to 224" is associated with An advance notice effect B is associated, and an advance notice effect C is associated with the range of "225 to 249". Further, the value of random number for effect is in the range of "250 to 255", similarly to the big win announcement effect selection table 222b1, "reselection" is associated.

For this reason, the advance notice effect A is selected when it becomes one of the 150 values "0 to 149" out of the 250 values "0 to 249", so the probability of selection is 60% ( 150/250). Further, since the advance notice effect B is selected when any of the 75 values "150 to 224" out of the 250 values "0 to 249" is reached, the probability is 30% (75 /250). Furthermore, since the advance notice effect C is selected when any of the 25 values "225 to 249" out of the 250 values "0 to 249" is obtained, the probability is 10% (25 /250). Therefore, in the case of being out, the announcement effect A is most likely to be selected as the kind of announcement effect, and the announcement effect C is the least likely to be selected. By providing a difference in the probability of selection, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win will occur based on the type of advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous while the variable display is being performed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, in addition to the effect image (for example, the variable effect image) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, another effect image is (For example, an advance notice effect image) is configured to be selected from the advance notice effect selection table 222b for selecting the type of the notice effect to be additionally displayed. By prescribing the notice effect selection table 222b separately from the variation pattern selection table 222a, the notice effect to be displayed in addition to the change effect can be easily selected. Supposing that the variation pattern selection table 222a defines the aspect of the variation effect including the type of the advance notice effect, the amount of data in the variation pattern selection table 222a will increase. For example, if there are 32 types of variable effects, and there are 3 types of advance notice effects that can be additionally displayed for each, 96 types (32×3) of variable effects for the variable pattern selection table 222a. The type must be specified. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern table 222a and the notice effect selection table 222b are separately prepared as in the present embodiment, 35 types (32+3) of change effects and notice effect types are provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the capacity of the ROM 222 from increasing.

In this embodiment, an IC that generates one of 8-bit (256 ways) values is used as the production random number generation IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC capable of generating 10-bit (1024 ways) values may be employed. In this case, 1000 values are used to select the advance notice effect in order to convert the percentage into an integer, and if 24 values different from the 1000 values are obtained, a re-lottery is performed. good too. Then, the minimum unit of 10 random numbers (determination values) may be associated with each effect. By configuring in this way, the percentage can be expressed as an integer, so that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand the probability and easy to design. Also, for example, an IC with a number of bits less than 8 bits (for example, 7 bits) may be employed. In this case, 100 values out of 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC may be used to select the advance notice effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the re-lottery. In this case as well, percentages can be expressed as integers, so that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand and easy to design.

Next, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 10(b). The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a notice reselection flag 223e, and a notice reselection counter. 223f, power-off flag 223y, and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. From, various information obtained when the lottery of the special pattern corresponding to the starting winning prize is carried out (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It's becoming

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1308 in FIG. 31). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 203c, its value can be updated.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of pending balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1302 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (see S1402 in FIG. 32). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1305 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S1408 in FIG. 32). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The notice reselection flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not "reselection" is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b. If this notice reselection flag 223e is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined from the notice effect selection table 222b (notice effect has not been decided), and if it is off, "reselection" has been determined. It means that it has not been decided (an advance notice effect has been decided). The initial value of the advance notice reselection flag 223e is set to OFF, and "reselection" is determined from the advance notice effect selection table 222b in the advance notice effect selection process (see FIG. 33) for selecting the type of notice effect. is set to ON (see S1506 in FIG. 33). Also, in the advance notice re-selection process (see FIG. 34), it is set to off when one of the advance notice effects (advance effects A to C) is determined, or when "re-selection" is determined continuously 10 times or more. (see S1613 in FIG. 34). By referring to this notice reselection flag 223e, when "reselection" is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b, the notice effect is reselected (re-lottery) in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34). can be executed.

The advance notice re-selection counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of times the process of re-selecting (re-drawing) the type of notice effect continues. Here, the re-lottery process for the advance notice effect is obtained by obtaining a new random value (determined value) from the effect random number generation IC 800 based on the determination of “reselection” from the advance notice effect selection table 222b. This is a process of re-selecting the type of announcement effect, and is executed in the announcement re-selection process (see FIG. 34). In this embodiment, when the process of re-lottering the type of notice effect continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, the process of re-lottering is terminated, and normal notice effects (notice effects A to C) are different. It is configured to execute different specific announcement effects (special announcement effects). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the fact that the re-lottery continues to be selected endlessly and the type of the advance notice effect is not determined. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display any of the advance notice effects at the display timing of the advance notice effects.

The initial value of the advance notice reselection counter 223f is set to 0, and is incremented by 1 each time the processing for re-lottering the type of advance notice effect is executed in the advance notice reselection processing (see FIG. 34) (see FIG. 34). S1607). In addition, in the advance notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), one of the advance notice effects (advanced effects A to C) is determined, or "reselection" is determined continuously 10 times or more, and a specific advance notice effect ( It is initialized to 0 (see S1612 in FIG. 34) when the jackpot determination notice effect and the jackpot expectation large notice effect) are set.

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 and is set to ON before the power-off process is executed (see S1216 in FIG. 30). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has passed. Therefore, when the power-off flag 223y is ON in the start-up process (FIG. 29) of the audio lamp control device 113 (see 1108: Yes in FIG. 29), the power-off flag 223y is set to ON for a certain period of time. (100 milliseconds) before the audible lamp controller 113 wakes up, that is, there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not deleted, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the deletion of only part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1109 in FIG. 29). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a time-lapse timer that measures the presentation time. are doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 31) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command. In addition, the clock timer measures the elapsed time from the start of an effect such as a variable effect. Based on the elapsed time measured by the clock timer, various controls (setting of actions of various characters, development of effects, etc.) are performed.

Next, details of the effect random number generation IC 800 electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The effect random number generation IC 800 is an IC for generating a determination value (random value) used for predetermined determination (determination of the type of advance notice effect to be displayed) executed in the sound lamp control device 113 . Since the effect random number generation IC 800 can randomly generate a value in the range of 8 bits (0 to 255) each time, the determination result can also be random. Therefore, the notice effect to be displayed can be determined at random, so that the notice effect to be displayed can be difficult to predict. Therefore, it is possible to provide games with unexpectedness.

The effect random number generation IC 800 stores a random number generator for generating a random value (random number) within the range of 8 bits (0 to 255) and the random number generated by the random number generator. A random number storage unit is provided at least for the purpose. The random number generation unit includes a random pulse generation circuit (RPG) that generates pulse signals at random time intervals. , and stored in the random number storage unit. The random number generation circuit has a specification capable of generating, for example, 200 megabytes worth of random numbers per second (two random numbers per 10 μs). That is, it is possible to update the random number value at a time interval shorter than the time interval at which the processing for determining the advance notice effect is executed. More specifically, when "reselection" is determined from the advance notice effect selection table 222b, the sound lamp control device 113 performs the effect in the advance notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) of the main process (see FIG. 30). A new random number value is acquired from the random number generation IC 800 for use, and a re-lottery for the advance notice effect is performed. Since the re-lottery of this notice performance continues to be executed at intervals of 1 millisecond as long as "reselection" is continued to be selected from the notice performance selection table 222b, one random value is acquired every 1 millisecond during this period. On the other hand, the random number generator is capable of generating two random numbers per 10 μs, so even if "Reselect" is selected in succession, a new random number will be used each time the re-lottery for the preview effect is performed. lottery (re-selection) can be executed. Therefore, the notice effect to be displayed can be determined at random, so that the notice effect to be displayed can be difficult to predict. Therefore, it is possible to provide games with unexpectedness.

The random number storage unit is a first-in-first-out (FIFO) storage device that stores random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit, with the upper limit being a predetermined number (eg, 16). The sound lamp control device 113 can read the random number value stored in the random number storage unit and use it to determine the type of the announcement effect. As described above, since the random number storage unit is a FIFO storage device, when the audio ramp controller 113 instructs to read the random number, the random number with the oldest stored timing is transferred to the audio ramp. Output to the control device 113 . Then, the read (output) random number value is discarded from the random number storage unit. As a result, random numbers generated at different timings can be output from the random number storage section each time the sound ramp control device 113 instructs to read random numbers, so that the random numbers can be made more random. can be done.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 35) executed after the boot process (see S1701 in FIG. 35) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 16) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long period of time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the power is turned on.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1703 and S1704 in FIG. 35).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 13 . FIG. 13 shows a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 13(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. 13(b) and 13(c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 14A and 14B are explanatory diagrams for explaining two kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 14(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage". Also, FIG. 15 shows the back surface C corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 14, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "town stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 shifts the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the rear image on the rear surface C is the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back surface C, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position as the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed as the initial back image of the back surface C. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 15(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 15(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 15(a) is displayed again, and the rear images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 14(a), the rear face A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear face A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the town stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c. Further, the rear surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 15(a), and the image data corresponding to the rear surface images between FIGS. is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 13A to 13B). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the rear surface B, the initial position of the rear surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. It can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face C, the images of FIGS. 15(a) so that the transfer of the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 15(b) to (c) and FIGS. to (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. Since the data can be transferred to the video RAM 236, after displaying the images of FIGS. 15(b) to (c) and FIGS. 15(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 for the back B and C is stored in sub areas dedicated to back images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 12) of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b' and positions b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above ten types of main patterns (see FIG. 4) with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third pattern display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it is not possible.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and an effect timing storage area. 233i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a back image change flag 233w, a back image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 16) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Such a configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 17). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 17).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 15, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1705 in FIG. 35). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 47(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2001 in FIG. 37B). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and the simple display setting process (see S2008 in FIG. 37(b) S2009) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 47A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 47(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 48) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is generated in which the content of the instruction to draw an image for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 16) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 37(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 44) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 18), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start transferring at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed (Fig. 37(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The effect timing storage area 233i displays the timing (value of the pointer 233f) for displaying the notice effects (previous notice effects A to C, the big win confirmation notice effect, and the big hit expectation large notice effect) for each variation pattern type, and the special notice effect. This is an area for storing the timing (the value of the pointer 233f) to start the operation. In this embodiment, when setting the notice effect or the special notice effect, the setting is made so that the notice effect or the special notice effect is displayed at the timing (the value of the pointer 233f) specified in the effect timing storage area 233i.

Here, a method for setting the advance notice effect in the display control device 114 will be described in detail. In this embodiment, a notice effect data table defining display contents for each type of notice effect for each frame is stored in the data table storage area 233b separately from the variable display data table and the like. Then, when a notice effect command for display for notifying the type of notice effect is notified from the sound lamp control device 113, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified command and the display data table buffer 233d at that time are stored. Synthesize with the set variable display data table. When synthesizing, the display contents specified in the announcement effect data table are displayed for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the announcement effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233i. to add. That is, in the announcement effect data table, display contents after the start timing of the announcement effect are specified for each elapsed time. By configuring in this manner, the data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently than in the case where addresses for all variable times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3502 in FIG. 49).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S2006 in FIG. 37B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S2801 in FIG. 43A). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3509 in FIG. 48), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S3510 in FIG. 48). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image discrimination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (S2802 in FIG. 43). reference). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. This demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (see S3021 in FIG. 44). It is set to OFF when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S2206 in FIG. 39A, S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41A, S2505 in FIG. 41B ), S2705 in FIG. 42). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (S3014 in FIG. 44). It is set to OFF when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S2206 in FIG. 39A, S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41A, S2505 in FIG. 41B ), S2705 in FIG. 42). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 19 to 28. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 256, 128, 128, 256) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special design variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), and the variation display of the special design (first design) performed in the first design display device 37 and the third design display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of suspensions of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed to start the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S212), and the value of the counter 203f during time saving is initialized to 0 (S213). Then, the variable probability flag 203e is set to OFF (S214), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S215), and the process proceeds to S218. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S215, when the main processing (see FIG. 27) jackpot control processing (S904) is executed, branch to S1001: Yes, and the opening command is set be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the process of S211, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 If it is above (S216: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203f (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the "big hit of the special design" or "out of the special design" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 perform It is a process for determining the production pattern (variation pattern) of the fluctuation production to be performed.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

Next, referring to the state of the variable probability flag 203e, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, when the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be in the probability variation of the special symbol (that is, the probability variation flag 203e is ON) (S302: Yes), the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and a special symbol big hit random number table for high probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big win is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the winning match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability variation (that is, the probability variation flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state, Based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol big winning random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random number "0" stored in the special symbol big winning random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 coincides with the winning random number value (that is, "0"), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A , jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 63", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "64 to 127", the jackpot It is determined to be B (16R short working hours jackpot) (see FIG. 8(b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 9A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( time).

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-order.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 115", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "116 to 127", the failure reach reach). On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is determined. set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 101", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "102 to 127", failure reach is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 time).

After the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S901 of the main processing (see FIG. 27). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), determines whether or not there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning , Reservation processing of values indicated by various random number counters, and processing for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from values indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (number of times of holding variable display in the special symbol N) is obtained (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. (S406), store in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a (S406), terminate this process and return to the timer interrupt process. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, referring to FIG. 23, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S501). The normal symbol (second symbol) win is during the second symbol display device 83 displaying the win, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S501: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is normal symbol time saving state (S508). In addition, in the processing of this S508, the value of the time saving counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability variation flag 203e is ON, it is determined that the time saving state of the normal design.

In the process of S508, when it is determined that it is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the middle of a jackpot (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of special symbols, it is difficult to win the lottery of normal symbols. This is because, during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the special winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory associated with the first ball entering hole 64 is opened. This is to prevent the ball, which is intended to enter the special winning hole 65a, from entering the first ball entering hole 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the first ball-entering hole 64, even if the ball is prevented from entering the first ball-entering hole 64 during the special symbol jackpot, the first ball-entering hole 65a Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. - 特許庁As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, the number of held balls for the first ball entrance 64 becomes maximum (4 times).

In the process of S509, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 212", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 213 to 255", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 8(c)).

In the process of S508, when it is determined that it is not the time-saving state of the normal pattern (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the low A lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained based on the normal symbol winning random number table for the probability time (S511). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 21 to 255", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 8(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S510 or S511 is a normal symbol win (S512), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S512: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S514), and if it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special design is currently in the jackpot (S515). ). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening the electric accessary and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S515, if the special symbol jackpot is not in effect (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so the first ball entrance 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S514:No), it transfers to the process of S517. In the process of S517, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the opening period of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 is set to 0. 2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S512, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S512: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S519, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the second symbol display device 83 changes The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times", the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of S522, if the variable time has not elapsed (S522: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S524: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 is set (S525), and this process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed. is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the process is terminated.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This thru gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the thru gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603 : No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d 1 is added to the value (M) (S604). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. area (S605), and the process ends. In the processing of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S812.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S901). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 22). Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 28) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S525 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) ends, the first symbol display device The variable display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 21). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "o" and the symbol "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S909). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values (both 255 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S908, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 25 has been executed, so the power-off process after S912 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S912), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S913). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

The processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the initial setting processing (see S801 in FIG. 26) , the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the processing of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), the jackpot flag 203g is set to ON (S1003), and this processing ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 27). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1004). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the processing of S1004, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S1004: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1005). If it is time to start a new round (S1005: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened (S1006), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1007). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1005, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1005: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is met (S1008). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1008, when the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1008: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1009), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a are not met (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1010). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the processing of S1010, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1010: Yes), an ending command is set (S1011), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 27). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1010, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending (S1010: No), then it is determined whether it is time to end the big win (special game state) (S1012). In the processing of S1012, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1012: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, if it is determined that it is the end timing (S1012: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot A (S1013), if the jackpot A (S1013: Yes), probability variation flag 203e is turned on (S1015), and the process proceeds to S1016. On the other hand, in the process of S1013, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot A (that is, a jackpot B) (S1013: No), the value of the counter 203f during time saving is set to 100 (S1014), and the process of S1016 Transition.

In the process of S1014 or the process of S1016 executed after the process of S1015 is completed, the jackpot flag 203g is set to OFF, and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 34. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 29, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1217 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1214 in FIG. 30), it executes power-off processing in S1217. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1217 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1102: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1217. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), it will transfer to S1104 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1104. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1217 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the process is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1103: No), and the process proceeds to S1108. .

In the processing of S1102, if the power-off processing flag is ON (S1102: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1217, It is started when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1104 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1104, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104) to determine whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1105). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

In the process of S1105, if it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( S1106). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1217 is executed (see S1215 in FIG. 30). In other words, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off processing of S1217 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and after the execution of the power-off process in S1217 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1109), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1110), an interrupt Permission is set (S1111), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1108 is reached while the power-off flag 223y is turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), S1109, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1110, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1110), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1111), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1109 is skipped is that when the process of S1108 is reached from S1104 through the process of S1106, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1104, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1201 was executed (S1201). If not (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1212 without performing the processes of S1202 to S1211. In the process of S1201, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed because S1202 to S1211 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S1212 and the variable display setting processing in S1213 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1212 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1213 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1203 to S1213 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1202). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1208 described later (S1203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1204). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1205 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1205, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1207). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command is set for the display control device 114.例文帳に追加By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect from a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the processing of S1207 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1208), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1209, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the process of S1210 ends, a new random number value (judgment value) is obtained due to the fact that "reselection" was decided when the announcement effect was decided, and the announcement reselection process for reselecting the announcement effect is executed. (S1211), and the process proceeds to S1212. The details of this advance notice reselection process (S1211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1212, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1212). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1213). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the process of S1213 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S1214). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . In the process of S1214, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1214: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S1216), and the power supply is turned on. A disconnection process is executed (S1217). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1218), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1214 (S1214: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1215: No), the process returns to S1201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1215: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1212). This command determination process (S1212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1301). When the variation pattern command is received (S1301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1302), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1303), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1301: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1304). When the stop type command is received (S1304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1305), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1306), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1304: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1307). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S1307: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (The number N of suspensions of variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol suspension ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1308). In addition, in the processing of S1308, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1308 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol pending ball number counter of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1308. 203c value. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice ramp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc., At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110.例文帳に追加Incidentally, when the process of S1308 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the processing of S1307, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S1307: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1309). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1309: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1310), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1202) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1309, if the opening command has not been received (S1309: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1311). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1311: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1312), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number. (S1313), and the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S1202) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round number command has not been received (S1311: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S1314). Then, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1314: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S1315), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1202) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1314 that the ending command has not been received (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1316) and returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1213). This variable display setting process (S1213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1401). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1401: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1407 to On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1402). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1403).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1404). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1405). In the process of S1405, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After the data is shifted, an advance notice effect selection process for selecting a form of the notice effect to be displayed in addition to the variation pattern (variation display) is executed (S1406), and then the process proceeds to S1407. The details of this advance notice effect selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1407, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1407). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not ON (that is, is OFF) (S1407: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is ON (S1407: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to OFF (S1408), and then the processing of S1306 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 31) , the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1409). Next, based on the stop type obtained in the process of S1409, a display stop type command is set (S1410), and this process ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to stop and display the third pattern in the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the announcement effect selection process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this advance notice effect selection process (S1406). This notice effect selection process (S1406) is executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed in addition to the change display (variation pattern). This is a process for determining the mode of and notifying the display control device 114 of it.

In this notice effect setting process (S1406), first, the effect random number value (determination value) for use in determining the notice effect is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S1501). The acquired random number value for effect is temporarily stored in, for example, a buffer area (random number buffer for effect) provided in the other memory area 223z. Next, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big win (S1502), and if it is determined that it is not a big win (S1502: No), the advance notice effect selection table 222b2 for losing (see FIG. 11(c)) is displayed. , the effect random number value (effect counter value) stored in the effect random number buffer is selected (determined) (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505.

Incidentally, as described above with reference to FIG. 11(c), when the value of the random number for effect (effect counter) is "0 to 149", "notice effect A" is determined as the type of the notice effect. When the value is "150-224", "previous effect B" is determined, and when the value is "225-249", "previous effect C" is determined. On the other hand, when the value is "250 to 255", "reselection" is determined. As described above, when "reselection" is determined, a new random number value is acquired from the production random number generation IC 800 in the advance notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) to be described later, and the type of advance notice production is reselected. Decide (reselect).

Thus, in this embodiment, 250 values out of 8-bit (256 ways) random number values for effect that can be generated by the random number generating IC 800 for effect are used for selecting the advance notice effect. That is, the values of the number (that is, 250) that are well separated in decimal numbers can be used to determine the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to set the probabilities of each advance notice effect to be selected to well-delimited values (10%, 30%, 60%) (percentages of probabilities are converted into integers). This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability that each advance notice effect will be selected. Also, the developer who designs the probabilities of the advance notice effects can more easily set the probabilities.

On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S1502: Yes), the big hit announcement effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11(b)) and the effect stored in the random number buffer for effect A notice effect is selected (determined) based on a random value (effect counter value) (S1503), and then the process proceeds to S1505. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 11(b), when the effect random number (effect counter value) is "0 to 24", the type of the effect is "previous effect A". is determined, and when the value is "25 to 99", "notice effect B" is determined as the type of notice effect, and when the value is "100 to 249", the type of notice effect is " The advance notice effect C" is determined. On the other hand, if the value is "250 to 255", "reselection" is determined.

In the processing of S1505, it is determined whether or not the selection result of the notice effect is "reselection" (S1505), and if the selection result is not "reselection" (S1505: No), the selected (determined) notice effect (S1507), and the present process is terminated.

The advance notice effect command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S1202) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 sets the display of the advance notice effect indicated by this advance notice effect command for display by receiving this advance notice effect command for display. That is, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type is combined with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When synthesizing, the display contents specified in the announcement effect data table are displayed for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the announcement effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233j. to add. That is, in the announcement effect data table, display contents after the start timing of the announcement effect are specified for each elapsed time. By configuring in this manner, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently than when addresses for all the variable times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1505 that "reselection" has been determined (selected) (S1505: Yes), the advance notice reselection flag 223e is set to ON (S1506), and this processing ends. By setting the advance notice reselection flag 223e to ON, in the advance notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) to be described later, a random value for effect can be newly acquired and the type of notice effect can be determined again.

Next, the advance notice reselection process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this advance notice reselection process (S1211). This advance notice reselection process (S1211) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the advance notice reselection process (S1211), first, it is determined whether or not the advance notice reselection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). As described above, this notice reselection flag 223e is a flag that is set to ON when "reselection" is determined when determining the type of notice effect. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is necessary to reselect the effect.

In the processing of S1601, if it is determined that the reselection flag 223e is off (S1601: No), there is no need to reselect the reselection of the notice effect, so this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that the re-selection flag 223e is ON (S1601: Yes), it is necessary to re-select the re-selection of the re-selection of the re-notification effect "re-selection" has been determined, and the type of advance notice effect has not been determined). Therefore, in this case, the random number value for effect is acquired from the random number generation IC 800 for effect (S1602), and then whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win (whether it is a variable display) is determined (S1603).

In the processing of S1603, if it is determined that the variable display is not for informing a big hit (S1603: No), the advance notice effect selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 11(c)) and the random value for effect (value of the effect counter) (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1603, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S1603: Yes), the big hit announcement effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11 (b)) and the random value for effect (effect counter value) and the type of the announcement effect is selected (S1604), and the process proceeds to S1606.

In the processing of S1606, it is determined whether or not the selection result of the advance notice effect is reselection (S1606). If the selection result of the notice effect is not reselected (S1606: No), the notice effect command is set based on the result of the selection result of the notice effect (S1614), and the process proceeds to S1612.

When determining (selecting) the type of notice effect, if "reselection" is decided (S1606: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the notice reselection counter 223f (S1607), then the reselection counter is 10 or more (S1608). In the processing of S1608, if it is determined that the value of the advance notice reselection counter 223f is less than 10 (S1608: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1608, if the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is 10 or more (S1608: Yes), the reselection of the notice effect is terminated, and the normal notice effects (prediction effects A to C) are different from the normal notice effects. (S1609 to S1611) for setting the notice effect (big hit confirmation notice effect, big hit expectation big notice effect). By terminating reselection when the number of consecutive reselections reaches 10 or more, it is prevented (suppressed) that 'reselection' continues to be selected (determined) and the type of notice effect is not determined. can. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display any of the advance notice effects at the display timing of the advance notice effects.

Processing (S1609- In S1611), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win (whether the variable display for setting the advance notice effect is a variable display for notifying the big win) (S1609). In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S1609: Yes), the decision of the big win is suggested as a specific notice effect (big win confirmation notice effect, big win expectation big notice effect). A display notice effect command for notifying the notice effect is set (S1610), and the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, in the process of S1609, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit (no) (S1609: No), as a specific notice effect (big hit confirmation notice effect, big hit expectation big notice effect), A display notice effect command for notifying a notice effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to S1612.

In this way, when "reselection" is determined continuously for a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more, a specific announcement effect (jackpot confirmed announcement effect, big win expectation high) not specified in the announcement effect selection table 222b By setting the advance notice effect, the player can be made to think that a rare notice effect is displayed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Note that the probability that “reselection” is determined ten times in a row is 6/256 to the 10th power (approximately 1/2 quintillion), which is a very low probability. Therefore, by displaying a specific notice effect (big win confirmation notice effect, big win expectation large notice effect), the player can be made to feel greater joy.

In the process of S1612 executed after the process of S1610, S1611, or S1614, the value of the advance notice reselection counter 223f is initialized to 0 (S1612), the advance notice reselection flag 223e is set to off (S1613), and this process exit. With this advance notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), the notice effect is reselected every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 30), thereby determining the type of notice effect without stopping other processes. can do.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the trigger for stopping the reselection of the advance notice effect is the case where the "reselection" is repeated ten times in a row, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined number of times "reselection" is selected may be set larger (eg, 20 times) or smaller (eg, 5 times). Moreover, it is of course possible to use the lapse of a predetermined time as a trigger (for example, 3 seconds after the first "reselection" is selected).

In the present embodiment, when the re-selection of the notice effect is terminated, a specific notice effect (jackpot confirmed notice effect, jackpot expectation large notice effect) is set, but not limited to this, the notice effect is performed. Of course, you can set it so that it does not exist.

In the present embodiment, re-selection is performed in selecting the preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is of course possible to reselect the effect mode of the effect displayed when the button is pressed (so-called button press effect).

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 49. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1701), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S1701) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S1701) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1801). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1802). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1802, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S1802, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S1803). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1804), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S1701 in FIG. 35) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S1702 in FIG. 35) (S1805), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S1701) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 36, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1803 to S1805 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S1801 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount further to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a at step S1801. and the processing of S1802 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S1803 to S1805 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S1803 to S1805 without performing the processes of S1801 and S1802 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1702). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. Further, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1703). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1703, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1704, the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S1705). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 47A), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S3302 in FIG. 47A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37B), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 13 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and simple display setting processing (see S2009 in FIG. 37B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 13(b) and (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1705, interrupt permission is set (S1706), and thereafter the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1706, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 37(a). FIG. 37(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1901), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 37(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 37(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001). If it is off (S2001: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81, command determination processing (S2002) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2003) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2002), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. FIG.

In the display setting process (S2003), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2002), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2004). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2003) or the simple display setting processing (S2009). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2005). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2006). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2004) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2005), , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2007). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2007, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete loss, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2001: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43, the details of the command determination process (S2002), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2101). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2003) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S2102). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2103).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2104), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2104: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S2105) and returns to the processing of S2101.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2105) will be described with reference to FIG. 39(a). FIG. 39(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2201).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. It could be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2201, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2201 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2202).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2201, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2204), and both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2205). When the processing of S2205 ends, a pointer value (pointer 233f value) indicating the execution start timing of the notice effect corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and a pointer indicating the execution start timing of the special notice effect The value (the value of the pointer 233f) is read out and stored in the effect timing storage area 233i (S2206), and this process ends.

By storing the execution start timing of the advance notice effect and the special advance notice effect in the effect timing storage area 233i, the notice effect data table or the special notice effect data is stored in the address after the stored timing (the value of the pointer 233f). The advance notice effect can be easily set simply by adding the prescribed contents of the table.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 39), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2204, the variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2201 From the display data table, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, it is transferred by the processing of S2202. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the data table buffer 233e. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2203 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation defined in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2104, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2106), If there is a display variation type command (S2106: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2107), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the stop type command process (S2107) will now be described with reference to FIG. 39(b). FIG. 39(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back out reach, front/back reach other than front/back out, complete loss, or chance number) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S2301), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S2302).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2302 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to OFF (S2303), the stop type command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S2302. In the above-described task processing (S2004), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2302 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2303, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S2302.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 38, the description is continued. In the processing of S2106, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2106: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an advance notice effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2108), If there is a notice effect command for display (S2108: Yes), the notice effect command process for setting the notice effect is executed (S2109), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the advance notice effect command process (S2109) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect command process. This notice effect command process is a process for setting the notice effect of the type notified by the display notice effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the notice effect command process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the notice effect can be set (S2401). Here, the timing at which the notice effect can be set specifically means that the value of the pointer 233f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233i as the start timing of the notice effect. That is, if it is temporally before the timing of starting the announcement effect in the current variation pattern, it is determined that the announcement effect can be set in the processing of S2401. In order to secure the processing time for setting the notice effect, a predetermined time before the timing of starting the notice effect may be set as a reference time, and it may be determined whether it is earlier than the reference time. . As a result, even if the processing time for setting the notice effect is long, the setting process of the notice effect is started by the above-mentioned reference time, so the setting process of the notice effect is completed by the timing of starting the notice effect. can be made

In the processing of S2401, if it is determined that it is time to set the advance notice effect (S2401: Yes), the advance notice effect data table corresponding to the type of notice effect notified by the display notice effect command is determined, Data is added after the pointer position corresponding to the announcement effect timing of the display data table buffer 233d (S2402), and the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not possible to set the advance notice effect (S2401: No), in the advance notice effect selection process (S1406) of the sound lamp control device 113, reselection is continuously determined, and so on. This is when the timing at which the notice effect command for display is notified exceeds the start timing of the notice effect. In this case, it is determined whether or not it is time to set the special notice effect for executing the notice effect in a special display mode (S2403).

Here, the timing at which the special notice effect can be set specifically means that the value of the pointer 233f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233i as the start timing of the special notice effect. . That is, if it is temporally before the timing of starting the special advance notice effect in the current variation pattern, it is determined that the special notice effect can be set in the processing of S2403.

In the processing of S2403, when it is determined that the timing for setting the special notice effect has come (S2403: Yes), the special effect data table corresponding to the display notice effect command is determined, and the special notice effect of the display data table is determined. The pointer position corresponding to the timing is set (S2404), and the process proceeds to S2405. The special notice effect is a effect in which the notice effect is executed in a special display mode, and based on the notified notice effect command for display, the effect executed from the start timing of the notice effect (for example, a boy in the center of the screen is displayed in a special display mode (for example, the effect in which a boy is displayed in a reduced size at the bottom left of the screen).

Through the processing of S2403 and S2404, even if the timing at which the notice effect command for display is notified exceeds the start timing of the notice effect, special A special notice effect can be displayed in a simple display mode. As a result, even when the notification timing of the display advance notice effect command is delayed, the special notice effect can be displayed based on the notified display advance notice effect command while avoiding overlapping display with other effects. As a result, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2403, when it is determined that the timing is not settable for the special notice effect (S2403: No), the processing proceeds to S2405. In the process of S2405, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2405), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this notice effect command processing, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type is combined with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to easily set the notice effect. be able to. It should be noted that when performing synthesis, for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the advance notice effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233j, the display specified in the notice effect data table is displayed. Configured to add content. That is, in the announcement effect data table, display contents after the start timing of the announcement effect are specified for each elapsed time. By configuring in this manner, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently than in the case where addresses for all variable times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

Returning to FIG. 38, the description is continued. In the processing of S2108, if it is determined that there is no advance notice effect command for display (S2108: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2110), and the command is displayed. If there is an opening command (S2110: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2111), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the opening command process (S2111) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S2503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S2605), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 38, the description is continued. In the process of S2110, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2110: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S2112), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command for use (S2112: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2113), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the round number command process (S2113) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process. This number-of-rounds command process is for executing a process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S2602).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2112, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S2112: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2114). If there is an ending command (S2114: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2115), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the ending command process (S2115) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S2702).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S2705), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S2114, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2114: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2116), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2116: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2117), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the back image change command process (S2117) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. This back image change command process is for executing a process corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image classification indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image discrimination flags are turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2802), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. . Then, when the specified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, in the task processing (S2004), if it is specified to display one of the back faces A to C according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S2802 is determined. , the type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and its RAM address are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2116, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2116: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2118). Otherwise (S2118: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2119), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the error command processing (S2119) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2902). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the processing of S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2118, if it is determined that there is no error command (S2118: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2120), and the process returns to S2101.

In the process of S2101, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes ), and the processing of S2102 to S2120 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2101 to S2120 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2008) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Only type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 39(b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2201, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2202, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S2003), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S3002), S3003-S3004 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3004).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S3101).

In the task processing (S2004), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or when it is determined in the process of S3003 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S3205), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always developed, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 44, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S3010), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON in the ON state (S3014), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2004), until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation, from the last stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the fixed display flag is ON (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81. You can set the drawing content so that is displayed.

In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the end of the fixed display effect, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S2009) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 13B or 13C) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, the details of the transfer setting process (S2005), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is turned off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 47(b). FIG. 47B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3401). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3402). In the process of S3402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process has not ended (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the processing of S3401, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S3403, if all the resident image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination process (see S2008 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 has A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 48) (see S3301: No in FIG. 47A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2003) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Also, in the processing of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processing of S3503 and S3504 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S3506).

In the process of S3506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

In the processing of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). is turned off (S3508), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is ON (S3509).

If the back image change flag 233w is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

In the process of S3509, if the back image change flag 233w is not ON but OFF (S3509: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the processing of S3515, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing ends.

In the process of S3513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: No), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3513 (S3513: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S3514). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3515), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the drawing process (S2006), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2004) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2005), the drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S2004), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2005), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S3602, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 37(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when performing a predetermined determination (determination of the type of advance notice effect to be displayed), the determination is performed again at a predetermined ratio (6/256). (the advance notice effect is reselected). Also, the number of determination values corresponding to reselection is set so that the number of determination values for which determination results are derived without being reselected is a sufficient number (250). That is, when the probability that each judgment result (announcement effects A to C) is determined in a predetermined judgment is expressed as a percentage (percentage), it is set to be an integer percentage (zero after the decimal point).

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines execute various lotteries such as a lottery for winning or not based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole, a lottery for display effects, and the like. In these lotteries, different lottery results are obtained according to the random numbers drawn, so randomness can be imparted to the lottery results.

However, since the random numbers used in various lotteries are generated by a dedicated IC or the like, it was common for the parameter of the lottery to be a bit unit (power of 2) due to IC specifications. For this reason, when the probability of each lottery result is converted into a percentage, it is normal that fractions (below the decimal point) occur. That is, percentages could not be expressed as integers. Therefore, it may be difficult to intuitively understand the lottery probability for each lottery result. Also, when designing a game machine, there were cases where the process of setting an integer percentage as a probability target and then calculating the number of random numbers closest to the set target was inefficient. There was a risk of becoming

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, random numbers for determining reselection are distributed so that the parameter of the probability in a predetermined lottery is 250, which is a multiple of 50. /50) You can distribute the probability of each lottery result by the percentage in increments. That is, the probability percentage of each lottery result can be easily converted into an integer, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the lottery result can be intuitively understood. In addition, by converting the percentage of the probability of each lottery result into an integer, it is possible to efficiently design the probability of each lottery result at the time of design.

In this embodiment, an IC that generates one of 8-bit (256 ways) values is used as the production random number generation IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC capable of generating 10-bit (1024 ways) values may be employed. In this case, in order to convert the percentage into an integer, for example, 1000 values that are multiples of 100 are used for selecting the advance notice effect, and if 24 values different from the 1000 values are obtained, a re-lottery is performed. may be configured to do so. Then, the number of random numbers (determined values) may be associated with each effect in a minimum unit of 10 (1/100 of the parameter). By configuring in this way, the percentage of the probability of obtaining each lottery result can be set as an integer value in increments of 1%, so it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand the probability and easy to design. . Also, for example, an IC with a number of bits less than 8 bits (for example, 5 bits) may be employed. In this case, 100 values out of 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC may be used to select the advance notice effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the re-lottery. In this case as well, percentages can be expressed as integers, so that it is possible to provide a game machine whose probability is easy to understand and whose design is easy to carry out. It should be noted that the percentage is not limited to integers, and may of course be in units of 0.1%.

In the present embodiment, a random number generated by a random number generation IC (so-called hardware random number) is used as the effect random number, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is of course possible to use values of random numbers generated by software processing (so-called software random numbers).

In this embodiment, when executing the lottery for the notice effect, it is configured so that reselection is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256), but the lottery that can decide reselection is the lottery for the notice effect. is not limited to For example, it may be configured so that re-selection is determined at a predetermined ratio even in the lottery when selecting the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 222a. Also, the lottery that enables reselection is not limited to the lottery executed by the sound lamp control device 113 . For example, it may be configured such that re-selection is selected at a predetermined ratio when lottery for whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot, or when lottery is made for a jackpot type or the like. By configuring in this way, when the probability of winning a big win, the probability of winning each kind of big win, etc. are represented by percentages, they can be represented by integer values. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine whose specifications are more easily understood.

In this embodiment, in the lottery for determining the notice effect, when "reselection" is determined 10 times or more, the lottery for determining the notice effect is terminated, and a specific notice effect ( However, the number of times the lottery is determined to be terminated is not limited to 10 times, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, by making it more than 10 times, it is possible to more reliably determine one of the types of advance notice effects (prediction effects A to C). In addition, for example, by making it less than 10 times, even if "re-selection" is determined continuously, the lottery in the form of the advance notice effect can be terminated with a smaller number of decisions, so the advance notice effect is determined. can shorten the time it takes.

In the present embodiment, the announcement effect notified in advance from the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to start at the timing (the value of the pointer 233f) specified in the effect timing storage area 233i, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, in the sound lamp control device 113, when it is determined that it is time to start the announcement effect, processing for determining the announcement effect may be executed. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to immediately start displaying the notified notice effect. By configuring in this way, the timing of notifying the type of the notice effect changes according to the number of times "reselection" is determined in the process of selecting the notice effect, so the timing of starting the notice effect can be varied. can. That is, not only the type of the announcement effect but also the start timing can be varied, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Furthermore, in order to provide variation in the timing of starting the notice effect, when "reselection" is determined, the process of selecting the notice effect again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed is executed. You may do so.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 63. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, when the audio lamp control device 113 draws lots for the type of notice effect, "reselection" is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256). In addition, the number of determination values corresponding to "reselection" is set so that the number of determination values for which the determination result is derived without being reselected is a sufficient number (for example, a multiple of 50). . That is, when the probability that each judgment result (announcement effects A to C) is determined in a predetermined judgment is expressed as a percentage (percentage), it is set to be an integer percentage (zero after the decimal point).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in some lottery (lottery of fluctuation pattern) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, "reselection" is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256) Configure. As a result, in the lottery (variation pattern lottery) in the main controller 110, when the probability that each determination result (each variation pattern) is determined is expressed as a percentage (percentage), an integer percentage (zero after the decimal point) becomes.

Further, when the lottery result corresponding to "reselection" is continuously obtained and the timing of notifying the variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is delayed, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a specific effect (wait progress effect). configured to run As long as the "reselection" continues, the result of the lottery is indeterminate, so the variable time is not determined. In other words, the display of the variation pattern cannot be started. In this case, by executing a specific effect (wait elapsing effect), the gaming machine can operate normally even if the lottery result remains uncertain for a long time (“reselection” continues many times). The player can be made to recognize that the Therefore, the game can be played with peace of mind.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 The configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp controller 113 is changed. A point that is partially changed, a part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and is executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The point is that part of the processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 50, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, in this embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, for the input/output port 205 of the main control unit 110 special figure random number generation IC900 and normal figure random number generation IC901 are electrically connected. The special figure random number generation IC 900 is used to generate various counter values (random numbers) obtained based on the start winning. In addition, the normal figure random number generation IC 901 is used to generate a counter value (random number) acquired based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 . That is, instead of the various counters (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS1, second winning random number counter C4) stored in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, It is configured to acquire a counter value (random value) used for various lotteries (judgments) executed in the main controller 110 from an external IC. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Moreover, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, in the second embodiment, the effect random number generation IC 800 in the first embodiment is eliminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the random number value (register value) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, the special figure random number generation IC 900 is provided with four types of registers (first hit random number register R1, first hit type register R2, stop type selection register R3, variation type register RS1). there is These registers play the same roles as the random number storage section of the production random number generation IC 800 in the first embodiment. That is, each register stores a random number value generated by a random number generator corresponding to each register, and outputs the random number value to the outside when there is an instruction to read out the random number value.

A random number value (register value) updated in the first winning random number register R1 is used to determine whether or not a special symbol jackpot is achieved. That is, the register value of the first winning random number register R1 corresponds to the first winning random number counter C1 in the first embodiment, and is a random value ( judgment value). A random value in the range of 0 to 255 is stored in the first random number register R1. Also, the stored value is updated, for example, twice every 10 μs (cycle of 200 kHz). Note that the frequency of updating the values stored in the other registers is the same as that of the first random number register R1, and only the range of values stored is different.

The register value updated in the first win type register R2 is used to select the jackpot type of the special symbol. That is, the value of the first winning type register R2 corresponds to the first winning type counter C2 in the first embodiment, and is a random value defined in the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B) ( judgment value). A random value in the range of 0 to 127 is stored in the first win type register R2.

The register value updated in the stop type selection register R3 is used to select the stop type that is out of the special symbol. That is, the value of the stop type selection register R3 corresponds to the stop type selection counter C3 in the first embodiment, and is compared with a random number value (determined value) defined in a stop type selection table (not shown). is determined (selected). A random value ranging from 0 to 127 is stored in the stop type selection register R3.

The register value updated in the variation type register RS1 is used to select a variation pattern (variation time). In other words, the value of this fluctuation type register RS1 corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the first embodiment, and is a random value (judgment value) to determine the type of variation pattern (variation time). A random value ranging from 0 to 255 is stored in this variation type selection register RS1. In addition, the random value (register value) obtained from each register of the special figure random number generation IC 900 (first per random number register R1, first per type register R2, stop type selection register R3, fluctuation type register RS1) After being temporarily stored in the figure counter temporary storage area 203j, it is transferred to the empty area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. That is, the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j includes the first hit random number counter buffer, the first hit type counter buffer, the stop type selection counter buffer, the variation type counter buffer (FIG. 6) among the counter buffers 203y in the first embodiment. reference).

In addition, the random number generation IC 901 for universal figure is provided with one type of register (second hit random number register R4). The register value updated in the second winning random number register R4 is used to determine whether or not the normal symbol wins. That is, the value stored in the second winning random number register R4 corresponds to the second winning random number counter C4 in the first embodiment, and is a random number specified in the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 8C). It is compared with a numerical value (determination value), and it is determined whether or not the winning pattern is normal. A random value ranging from 0 to 255 is stored in the second random number register R4.

In addition, the random number value (register value) obtained from the second per random number register R4 of the general pattern random number generation IC 901 is temporarily stored in the general pattern counter temporary storage area 203k, and then the normal pattern holding ball storage area. 203b is transferred to the free area. That is, the normal map counter temporary storage area 203k is a storage area corresponding to the second hit random number counter buffer in the counter buffer 203y in the first embodiment.

Thus, in this embodiment, various determinations to be executed in the main control device 110, the random number generated by the random number generation IC900 for the special figure provided outside the main control device 110, and the random number generation IC901 for the normal figure It is configured to execute based on (hardware random numbers). With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Moreover, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the random number generation IC (random number generation IC900 for the special figure, and random number generation IC901 for the normal figure) in which the random number is updated (generated) at a frequency of 2 times in 10 μs (period of 200 kHz) However, it is not limited to this. For example, a random number generation IC capable of updating (generating) a random value when acquiring a value from each random number generation IC may be used. As a result, the number of times the random number generation IC updates (generates) the random number can be minimized, so power consumption can be reduced.

In this embodiment, a random number generation IC (random number generation IC 900 for special figures, and random number generation IC 901 for general figures) that can acquire random values that are random values each time it is updated (generated) is used. is not limited to For example, by using a random number generation IC that updates the value by 1 at short intervals (for example, 1 μs), the timing of acquiring the value from the random number generation IC becomes irregular, resulting in a substantially random value. Naturally, it may be acquired.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52(a). As shown in FIG. 52(a), the RAM 203 of this embodiment has a main reselection counter 203h and a main reselection flag 203i added to the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. In place of the counter buffer 203y, a special figure counter temporary storage area 203j and a normal figure counter temporary storage area 203k are provided.

The main reselection counter 203h is a counter that indicates the number of times "reselection" is continuously selected in a predetermined determination (decision of variation pattern) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, when determining the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 and the fluctuation type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53(a) to (c)), a predetermined (6/256) to select "reselection". When this "reselection" is selected, as in the case where "reselection" is selected at the time of selection of the notice effect in the first embodiment, the random number used for determining the variation pattern (the value of the variation type counter RS1) is newly obtained, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is judged again based on the new random number value. Here, the variation pattern (variation time) must be quickly determined because the variation pattern cannot be started unless the process of selecting the variation pattern (variation time) is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when "reselection" is determined, the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is immediately reacquired without executing other processing, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined. do. However, if the "reselection" continues too many times, the period in which other processes (for example, the start winning process, the through gate passing process, etc.) are not executed becomes longer, and for example, the start winning process cannot be detected. Otherwise, there is a possibility that passage through the through gate 67 cannot be detected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of times "reselection" is determined continuously is counted by the main reselection counter 203h, and when "reselection" continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) or more is configured to once execute another process executed by the MPU 201, and then execute the process of reacquiring the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 and determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). By configuring in this way, it is possible to quickly execute a process for determining a variation pattern within a range that does not affect other processes.

The initial value of the main reselection counter 203h is set to 0, and "reselection" is determined in the process of selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56). The value is incremented by 1 every time it is set (see S333 in FIG. 56). In addition, "reselection" is determined four times or more in succession, and is initialized to 0 when the process for selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time) is interrupted (see S336 in FIG. 56). .

Here, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the variation pattern table 202d, which is a data table in which "reselection" is associated with part of the random value (determination value), will be described. This fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, like the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment, but its defined contents are changed from the first embodiment. First, FIG. 53(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53(a), in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the present embodiment, "reselection" is associated with some judgment values (random numbers). Also, by allocating the determination value (random number) to the "reselection", the allocation of the determination value (random number) to other determination results is changed.

Specifically, as a judgment value, the range of "0 to 24" is associated with the variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "25 to 174" is associated with the variation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds). , and the range of "175 to 249" is associated with various variation patterns of special reach (90 seconds). The remaining determination values of "250 to 255" are associated with "reselection". By setting the number of judgment values (random values) for determining “reselection” to 6 “250 to 255”, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach ( 90 seconds) can be 250 random values (0-249). 1% is equivalent to 2.5 random numbers (judgment value) (250/100), so if you assign random numbers (judgment value) with 5 pieces (2%) as the minimum unit, the probability percentage will be Can be an integer value.

In this embodiment, 25 judgment values of "0 to 24" (5 × 5) are assigned to various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and "25 to 174" are assigned to various types of super reach (60 seconds). 150 (5 x 30) judgment values are assigned, and 75 (5 x 15) judgment values of "175 to 249" are assigned to each type of special reach (90 seconds). Therefore, the probability of selecting normal reach is 10% (2% x 5), the probability of selecting super reach (60 seconds) is 60% (2% x 30), and special reach (90 seconds). is selected is 30% (2%×15). That is, random numbers (decision values) are assigned such that the percentage of the rate at which each variation pattern is selected is an integer value. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) fractions (below the decimal point) from appearing in percentages, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine with specifications that are easier to understand. Also, at the time of designing, it is possible to efficiently allocate the probability of each determination result.

In addition, the random number (determined value) is similarly set for the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 53(b)) and the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 53(c)). "Reselect" is associated with the range of "250 to 255". That is, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined only when 250 (0 to 249) out of 256 random numbers (determined values) are obtained. In addition, by setting the number of random numbers associated with each variation pattern to be a multiple of 5, the percentage of the probability that each variation pattern (variation time) is selected is expressed as an integer. As a result, the probability can be set to a more comprehensible value regardless of whether it is a big win or a loss.

Returning to FIG. 52(a), the description continues. The main reselection flag 203i is a flag that indicates whether or not "reselection" has been determined consecutively for a predetermined number of times (four times) or more in the process of selecting (determining) a variation pattern (variation time). If this main reselection flag 203i is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined four times or more in succession, and if it is off, it means that the number of consecutive "reselections" is less than four times. means. In the main reselection process (see FIG. 59) executed in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in this embodiment, this main reselection flag 203i is referred to (see S4101 in FIG. 59), and the main reselection If the selection flag 203i is ON, a process (see S4102 to S4107 in FIG. 59) for determining a variation pattern (variation time) by newly acquiring a random value from the variation type register RS1 is executed.

As described above, the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j and the normal figure counter temporary storage area 203k are temporary storage areas for temporarily storing each register value instead of the counter buffer 203y (FIG. 51 reference). Each random value (register value) obtained from the special figure random number generation IC 900 is stored in the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j, and then transferred to the empty area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In addition, the random number value (register value) acquired from the random number generation IC 901 for the general pattern is stored in the counter temporary storage area 203k for general pattern, and then transferred to the free area of the normal pattern holding ball storage area 203b.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52(b). As shown in FIG. 52, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment has a weight measurement counter 223g and a weight measurement flag 223h added to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment.

The weight measurement counter 223g ends the variation display when the variation display (variation pattern) ends in a state where at least 1 variation is suspended (the value of the special symbol retention ball number counter 223b is 1 or more). It is a counter for counting the elapsed time after the This weight measurement counter 223g is incremented by 1 in the weight progress rendering process (see FIG. 63) from when the stop command is received when the number of pending balls is 1 or more until the next variable display is started. . Since the wait effect effect process (see FIG. 63) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) of the sound lamp control device 113, the weight measurement counter 223g counts 1 every 1 millisecond. are added one by one. In this embodiment, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is referred to in the weight progress effect process (see FIG. 63) (see S4205 in FIG. 63), and a predetermined period of time (1050 milliseconds) has elapsed since the previous variation ended. It is configured to execute a specific effect (wait elapse effect) when the next variation that is on hold does not start even after the elapse (no variation pattern command is output from the main controller 110) (Fig. 63 (see S4206 of ).

Here, the case where the variation pattern command is not output from the main controller 110 even after a predetermined period of time has passed means that the process for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the main controller 110 takes time. etc. That is, in the process of determining the variation pattern from the variation pattern table 202d, "reselection" is determined continuously, and a new random value (determined value) is acquired from the variation type register RS1 and defined in the variation pattern table 202d. This is the case, for example, when the process of comparing with the determined judgment value is repeated endlessly. If the variation pattern (variation time) is not determined, it is not possible to set a variation pattern command from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, so the previous variation ends so that "reselection" is repeated. The period from the start of the next fluctuation to the start of the next fluctuation becomes longer. In this case, if the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to wait until it receives the variation pattern command, the third pattern is stopped and displayed, and the reserved pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. In spite of this, since the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 do not change, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) elapses without the next variation starting after the previous variation pattern (variation display) ends, a specific effect (wait It is configured to execute a transition effect). As a result, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 are changed, so that the player can be made to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally even if the next variable performance is not started. can. In addition, as the wait lapse effect, even if the variation pattern command is notified immediately after the effect is started, the effect that has little influence on the variation time notified by the variation pattern command (effect that can be ended immediately). is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or a plurality of stop symbols shine is executed until the variation pattern command is notified. By executing a simple performance without a story or the like (a performance in which a pattern shines), even if a variation pattern command is received during the performance and the variation is started, the player is less likely to feel a sense of incongruity. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

The weight measurement flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the previous variation has been completed in a state where the number of pending balls is 1 or more and no variation pattern command has been notified. In other words, it indicates whether or not it is a period during which the weight measurement counter 223g performs time measurement (counting). If this weight measurement flag 223h is on, it means that the previous variation effect is finished and the next variation pattern command is not notified, so the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) is executed during this time. The value of the weight measurement counter 223g is updated each time (see S4202 in FIG. 63). On the other hand, if the weight measurement flag 223h is off, the weight measurement counter 223g is not updated because it is not the time to wait for notification of the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 . This weight measurement flag 223h is set to ON when a stop command is received from the main controller 110 and there is a ball on hold (S1335 in FIG. 62). Also, it is set to OFF each time a variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 (see S1332 in FIG. 62). With this weight measurement flag 223h, the weight measurement counter 223g can be updated accurately.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. First, timer interrupt processing 2 executed by MPU 201 in main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, like the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19). It is a periodic process that is executed every

In timer interrupt processing 2 of the second embodiment, S101, S106, S108, and S109 each correspond to steps S101, S104, S106, and S108 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment. , and S109 are executed.

Further, in the timer interrupt processing 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 20), starting winning processing (see FIG. 22), through gate passing processing (see FIG. 24) ), a special symbol variation process 2 (S104), a starting winning process 2 (S105), and a through gate passing process 2 (S107) are executed respectively. Details of each of these processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. Furthermore, in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, when the process of S108 ends, the process for determining the variation pattern (variation time) (special symbol variation start process 2) is performed more than a predetermined number of times (four times Above) When reselection is determined, the main reselection process for determining the variation pattern (variation time) is executed (S131), and the process proceeds to S109. The details of this main reselection process (S131) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 2 (S104) is similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, and the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. , the process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the third pattern display device 81, and the like.

Of the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second embodiment, in each process of S201 to S207 and S209 to S218, S201 to S207 and S209 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) in the first embodiment respectively The same processing as each processing of S218 is executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the process of S202 is not in process of variation (S202: No), a predetermined time has passed since the previous stop display of the third symbol. It is determined whether or not (one second) has elapsed (S231), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S231: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S231 that the predetermined time has passed (S231: Yes), the processes of S203 to S208 are executed. In addition, in the process of S208 in this embodiment, instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, a special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) is executed. The details of this special symbol variation process 2 (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, special symbol variation start processing 2 (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 2 (S208) in the second embodiment. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) is similar to the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. ", or "out of the special pattern" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the variable production performed by the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81 is determined. This process is for

Among the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S208) in the second embodiment, in each processing of S301 to S311, each processing of S301 to S311 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment respectively The same processing is performed. Also, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), when the process of S307 or S309 ends, the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 53(a) to (c)) in the process of S307 or S309, Based on the value of the fluctuation type register RS1, it is determined whether or not "reselection" has been determined (selected) (S331). Then, if it is determined that "reselection" is determined in the process of S331 (S331: Yes), the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is newly obtained from the special figure random number generation IC900 (S332), the main re- 1 is added to the value of the selection counter 203h (S333). Next, it is determined whether the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334), and if the value is less than 4 (S334: No), each of S305 to S309 for selecting a variation pattern Execute the process again.

On the other hand, in the process of S334, if it is determined that the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334: Yes), the process of repeating the reselection of the variation pattern is once terminated, and the main reselection flag 203i is set. It is set to ON (S335). Then, the main reselection counter 203h is initialized to 0 (S336), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S331, when it is determined that "reselection" is determined in the process of S307 or S309 (S331: No), the process proceeds to S310. By the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), the variation pattern is determined, and when "reselection" is determined, the reselection of the variation pattern can be repeated. Here, the variation pattern (variation time) must be quickly determined because the variation pattern cannot be started unless the process of selecting the variation pattern (variation time) is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when "reselection" is determined, the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is immediately reacquired without executing other processing, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined. do. However, if the "reselection" continues too many times, the period in which other processes (for example, the start winning process, the through gate passing process, etc.) are not executed becomes longer, and for example, the start winning process cannot be detected. Otherwise, there is a possibility that passage through the through gate 67 cannot be detected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of times "reselection" is determined continuously is counted by the main reselection counter 203h, and when "reselection" continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) or more is configured to once execute another process executed by the MPU 201, and then execute the process of reacquiring the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 and determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). By configuring in this way, it is possible to quickly execute a process for determining a variation pattern within a range that does not affect other processes.

Next, referring to FIG. 57, the starting winning process 2 (S105) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process 2 (S105) in the second embodiment.

Of the starting winning process (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, each process of S401 to S405 is the same as each process of S401 to S405 of the starting winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. is executed.

Further, in the starting winning process 2 (S105) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 in the process of S401 (S401: Yes), the first winning random number register R1 , The values of the first hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 are acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900, stored in the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j (S431), and the process of S402 is performed. .

In addition, in the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 57), when the process of S405 ends, each value of the special symbol counter temporary storage area 203j provided in the RAM 203 is stored in the empty area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. (S432), this processing ends. By this starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 57), various random numbers (various register values) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 can be acquired and used for special symbol lottery. By using random numbers generated by hardware in the lottery, the lottery results can be made more random.

Next, through gate passage processing 2 (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 2 (S107) in the second embodiment. This through gate passage processing 2 (S107) is similar to the through gate passage processing (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. , It is a process for acquiring and holding a random number value used for the winning lottery of normal symbols.

In the through-gate passing process 2 (S107), the processes in S601 to S604 are the same as the processes in S601 to S604 of the through-gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. . Further, in the through gate passing process 2 (S107) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in the process of S601 (S601: Yes), the value of the second hit random number register R4 is changed to Acquired from the random number generation IC 901 for the normal pattern, stored in the counter temporary storage area for the normal pattern 203k (S631), and proceeds to the process of S602.

In addition, in the through gate passing process 2 (S107) in the present embodiment, when the process of S604 is completed, the value of the normal pattern counter temporary storage area 203k provided in the RAM 203 is stored in the free area of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. Store (S632), and terminate this process. By this through gate passage processing 2 (see FIG. 58), various random numbers (various register values) generated by the normal pattern random number generation IC 901 can be acquired and used for normal pattern lottery. By using random numbers generated by hardware in the lottery, the lottery results can be made more random.

Next, the main reselection process (S131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main reselection process (S131) is one process in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and is a special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56). In the process for determining the variation pattern, when "reselection" is determined four or more times in a row, the process for selecting the variation pattern based on the determination of "reselection" for the fourth and subsequent times be.

In this main reselection process (S131), first, it is determined whether the main reselection flag 203i is ON (S4101). If the main reselection flag 203i is off (S4101: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt process 2 is returned to. If the main reselection flag 203i is on (S4101: Yes), then the value of the variation type register RS1 is acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 (S4102), and the jackpot lottery result and the value of the variation type register RS1 A variation pattern is determined based on (S4103). Then, it is determined whether the determined variation pattern is "reselection" (S4104). If the determined variation pattern is reselection (S4104: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. In this way, when "reselection" is determined from the variation pattern table 202d, the next timer interrupt processing 2 (see FIG. 54 ), the process of reselecting a variation pattern can be performed again in the main reselection process (S131) executed in step S131.

On the other hand, in the process of S4104, if it is determined that the determined variation pattern is not reselected (S4104: No), based on the variation pattern determined in the process of S4103, set the variation pattern command (S4105), set A stop type command is set based on the displayed mode (S4106). Next, the main reselection flag 203i is set to OFF (S4107), and this processing ends.

Next, main processing 2 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 in the second embodiment. The main processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment is similar to the main processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. processing.

In the main processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, the processing of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915 is performed in each of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915 in the first embodiment. The same processing as the processing is executed. Further, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, the processes of S902, S910, and S911 of the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are abolished (deleted). In this embodiment, random numbers (register values) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 are used for various lotteries, and there is no need to generate random numbers by software, so S902 for updating various counter values, Each process of S910 and S911 is abolished. It is the same as the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment except that each of these processes is abolished. Thus, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, by using the random number generation IC (random number generation IC 900 for the special figure and random number generation IC 901 for the general figure), a random number is generated in software Therefore, the processing (S902, S910, and S911) can be made unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 61, main processing 2 (see FIG. 61) of the audio ramp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 in the second embodiment. In the main process 2 (see FIG. 61), the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1213 to S1218 are the same as the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, after executing the processes of S1201 to S1210, a wait elapse effect process, which will be described later, is executed (S1231). Details will be described later, but in this wait effect effect process (S1231), a predetermined period of time (1050 milliseconds) has passed without the next variation starting after the previous variation pattern (variation display) has ended. In this case, it is a process for setting a specific effect (wait progress effect).

After execution of the wait lapse effect (S1231), command determination processing 2 (S1212) is executed in place of the command determination processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and processing from S1213 onwards is executed. Details of this command determination process 2 (S1212) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment. The command determination process 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment determines the command received from the main controller 110, and determines the This is the process of executing control.

S1301 to S1308 and S1316 of the command determination process 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment correspond to S1301 to S1308 and S1316 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The same processing as the processing is executed.

In the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1303 ends, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is initialized to 0 (S1331), and the weight measurement flag 223h is set to off. (S1332), this processing ends.

In addition, in the command determination process 2 in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1307 that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S1307: No), then it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1333 ). If a stop command has been received (S1333: Yes), then it is determined whether there is a reserved ball based on the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S1334), and there is a reserved ball (that is, a special symbol reserved (S1334: Yes), the weight measurement flag 223h is set to OFF (S1335), and this process ends. Also, in the process of S1334, even if it is determined that there is no held ball (S1334: No), this process is terminated as it is.

By setting the weight measurement flag 223h on for the ball on hold, the state in which the previous variation is completed and the variation pattern command is not received despite the presence of the ball on hold is counted (timed). be able to. In this embodiment, when this state continues for 1050 milliseconds, a specific effect (wait elapsing effect) is executed. As a result, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 can be changed even if the variation pattern command is not received, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally even if the next variation performance is not started. It is possible to make the player recognize that there is.

If it is determined in the process of S1333 that the stop command has not been received (S1333: No), the process of S1316 is executed, and then the command determination process 2 ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the wait progress effect process (S1231) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the wait effect effect process (S1231). This wait lapse effect processing (S1231) is, as described above, a process for setting a specific effect (wait lapse effect).

In the weight progress effect process (S1231), first, it is determined whether or not the weight measurement flag 223h is on (S4201). In the process of S4201, if it is determined that the weight measurement flag 223h is off (S4201: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4201 that the weight measurement flag 223h is ON (S4201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the weight measurement counter 223g (S4202), and then the value of the weight measurement counter 223g becomes 3000. It is determined whether it is greater than (S4203). In the processing of S4202, if it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is greater than 3000 (S4203: Yes), it means that 3 seconds or more have passed since the previous variation pattern (variation display) ended. do. That is, even though enough time has passed to receive the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, it means that the variation pattern command has not been received, so some abnormality (for example, the main controller There is a high possibility that the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 cannot be received normally due to a failure of the main controller 110 or an abnormality in the harness (disconnection, etc.). Therefore, in this case, a display error command for setting a display for informing the player or hall of the occurrence of an error is set (S4204), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is 3000 or less (S4203: No), then it is determined whether the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is greater than 1050 (S4205). If it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is greater than 1050 (S4205: Yes), the fluctuation pattern command means that you have not received That is, when main controller 110 selects a variation pattern (variation time), there is a high possibility that “reselection” continues to be determined and the determination of the variation pattern (variation time) is delayed. Therefore, in this case, a display wait progress effect command for setting display of a specific effect (wait progress effect) is set (S4206), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4205 that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is smaller than 1050 (S4205: No), this process ends.

The display wait progress effect command set in the process of S4206 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1202) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 displays a specific effect (wait progress effect) on the third symbol display device 81 upon receiving the advance notice command for display.

In addition, as the wait lapse effect, even if the variation pattern command is notified immediately after the effect is started, the effect that has little influence on the variation time notified by the variation pattern command (effect that can be ended immediately). is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or a plurality of stop symbols shine is executed until the variation pattern command is notified. By executing a simple performance without a story or the like (a performance in which a pattern shines), even if a variation pattern command is received during the performance and the variation is started, the player is less likely to feel a sense of incongruity. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous variation display is completed even though the number of pending balls is 1 or more, the wait progress effect is executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined condition is established, even if the variation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period of time (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous variation display is completed, the wait progress effect is not executed. good too. More specifically, if it is known in advance that the next variation will be a variation that will result in a big win, for example, by pre-reading the determination result of the big win, the wait progress effect may not be executed. As a result, the player temporarily feels uncomfortable that the variable display is not started even though the number of reserved balls is 1 or more. It is possible to give the impression that the delay in winning was a harbinger of a big win. As a result, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a predetermined ratio (6/256 ) is configured so that "Reselect" is selected. Also, the number of determination values corresponding to reselection is set so that the number of determination values for which determination results are derived without being reselected is a sufficient number (250). That is, when the probability that each determination result (variation pattern type) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage, it is set to be an integer percentage (zero after the decimal point). As a result, when the probability of obtaining each determination result is expressed as a percentage, the value becomes easier to understand.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable effect is started based on the winning of a game ball into a starting hole. If the winning is not suspended, this variable performance will start immediately after winning (for example, within 1 second). (eg, within 1 second).

However, if the variable performance is not started immediately after the winning or the variable performance based on the winning immediately before the suspension is completed, the game is not started even though it is the timing at which the game is normally started. There is a possibility that the player will be distrusted.

For example, in the present embodiment, reselection is selected at a predetermined ratio (6/256) in the process of determining the variation pattern of main controller 110 . Therefore, if "re-selection" is determined continuously, the variation pattern is not determined during that time, so the period from the end of one variable display to the start of the next variable display is long. As a result, the problem described above occurs.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, even though the number of pending balls is 1 or more, after the previous fluctuation display is completed, the fluctuation pattern command is notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or longer. If not, it is configured to execute a specific effect (wait progress effect). As a result, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 can be changed even if the variation pattern command is not received, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally even if the next variation performance is not started. It is possible to make the player recognize that there is. In addition, as the wait lapse effect, even if the variation pattern command is notified immediately after the effect is started, the effect that has little influence on the variation time notified by the variation pattern command (effect that can be ended immediately). is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or a plurality of stop symbols shine is executed until the variation pattern command is notified. By executing a simple performance without a story or the like (a performance in which a pattern shines), even if a variation pattern command is received during the performance and the variation is started, the player is less likely to feel a sense of incongruity. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period of time (1050 milliseconds) or more, a specific effect (wait progress effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Naturally, a specific effect (wait progress effect) may be executed when "reselection" continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) as a result of the lottery of the variation pattern.

In this embodiment, when 1050 milliseconds have passed since the last fluctuation stop, the weight elapse effect (lighting pattern effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the variation pattern command is not received, the symbol variation may be started. As a result, the next variation is started at least 1050 milliseconds after the last symbol stop, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) the symbol stop state from continuing for a long time. Therefore, the player can play the game without feeling uncomfortable.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 70. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above is configured to acquire random numbers used for drawing (determining) the type of advance notice effect one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800 when the lottery is executed. rice field.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of random numbers are acquired in advance from the effect random number generation IC 800 and stored in the RAM 223. It is configured to perform the lottery (determination) of In addition, when obtaining a random number in advance, it is determined whether the lottery result is a random number that will be "re-lottery" (that is, a random number in the range of "250 to 255"), and "re-lottery" is performed. The RAM 223 is configured to store only random numbers for which is not determined (that is, random numbers in the range of “0 to 249”). In other words, the value corresponding to "re-lottery" is not stored in the RAM 223 and is discarded. As a result, when the lottery (decision) process of the notice effect is actually executed, the "re-lottery" will not be decided, so the decision of the notice effect will be delayed due to the continuous "re-lottery". This can be prevented (suppressed).

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with an RTC 292 for measuring the current time, and the sound lamp control The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. It is a point. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the RTC 292 is electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 . This RTC 292 can clock the current time. The audio lamp control device 113 can acquire the time clocked by the RTC 292 . Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on (when the RAM 223 does not store a predetermined number (100) of random numbers), a predetermined random number is displayed in the RAM 223. It is configured to read and store from the counter initial value table 222c. In this effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality of pattern combinations are defined as initial values of 100 random numbers stored in the RAM 223. FIG. In this embodiment, different combinations of random numbers are set as initial values according to the current time acquired from the RTC 292 . As a result, it is possible to quickly determine the initial value of the random number and to set the random number value as the initial value to a more random value.

Next, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65(a). As shown in FIG. 65(a), the ROM 222 of this embodiment is provided with an effect counter initial value table 222c in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment. This effect counter initial value table 222c is a data table used for selecting the initial value of the random number value referred to when selecting the advance notice effect. In this effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality (10 patterns) of combinations of a predetermined number (100) of random numbers selectable as initial values are defined. Further, all the random numbers defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c are values within the range of "0 to 249". That is, the random number value set as the initial value is a random number value outside the range of the random number value (that is, "250 to 255") in which "reselection" is determined. Thus, when selecting the type of the notice performance, the type can be selected without selecting "reselection", so that the processing time related to the determination (selection) of the notice performance can be shortened.

When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the effect counter initial value table 222c is referenced to select an initial value. The selected initial value is stored in a later-described effect counter storage area 223i.

Details of the effect counter initial value table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of specified contents of the effect counter initial value table 222c. As shown in FIG. 66, the effect counter initial value table 222c defines 10 patterns (table Nos. 1 to 10) of combinations of 100 random numbers (arrangement Nos. 1 to 100). In the present embodiment, in startup processing 3 (see FIG. 67) executed based on power-on, No. One of the tables 1 to 10 is selected and stored in the effect counter storage area 223i.

In addition, No. When acquiring any one of the tables 1 to 10, the table corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292 is selected. More specifically, if the last digit of the number of seconds in the power-on time is 1, No. 1 table is obtained, and if the last digit is 2, No. 2 tables are obtained. Similarly, if the last digit is 3, No. 3 table, if the last digit is 4, No. 4 table, . . . If the last digit is 0, then No. Ten tables are selected. As a result, a combination of random numbers different each time can be set as an initial value according to the timing of turning on the power, so that the type can be determined more randomly when determining (selecting) the advance notice performance.

The number of tables and the number of arrays of each table are not limited to those described above. For example, the number of tables may be 15 patterns or 5 patterns. The number of arrays may be 150 or 50, of course.

Also, the method of selecting a table according to the current time is not limited to the above. For example, the table may be selected according to the last digit of the millisecond of the power-on time. As a result, even when a plurality of gaming machines are powered on at the same time, the tables selected by each gaming machine can be made different (random values can be set for each gaming machine).

In this embodiment, the table is selected according to the current time clocked by the RTC 292, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, selection may be made according to measurement results (temperature, humidity, amount of light, sound volume, etc.) of other measurement means, or a combination of these measurement results may be selected. Further, the selection may be made based on the random number generated by the hardware random number generation IC, or the random number may be generated by software processing and the selection may be made based on the random number.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65(b). As shown in FIG. 65(b), the RAM 223 in this embodiment has a production counter storage area 223i, an acquisition pointer 223j, and a reacquisition flag 223k in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. there is

The production counter storage area 223i is a storage area for storing the production counter value (random number for production) used when determining (selecting) the announcement production from the announcement production selection table 222b. It consists of 100 storage areas associated with the values to be obtained. Each memory area stores one random number value (random number value for effect) used for determining the type of the advance notice effect. As for the random number value stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, a new random number value is obtained from the random number generation IC 800 for effect each time one random value is used to select the advance notice effect. The obtained random number value is overwritten in the storage area storing the random number value used for selecting the advance notice effect (see S4305 in FIG. 69). As a result, the effect counter storage area 223i can maintain a state in which 100 random numbers generated at different timings are stored.

The acquisition pointer 223j is a pointer that indicates which of the 100 random numbers stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is to be selected. When selecting the type of notice effect, the value of this acquisition pointer 223j is referred to, the random number for effect is selected from the storage area corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j, and the judgment value defined in the notice effect selection table 222b. The type of advance notice effect is determined based on (random value). The value of this acquisition pointer 223j is updated by 1 each time a random number value of 1 is acquired from the effect counter storage area 223i for determining the type of advance notice effect. As a result, the random number for effect can be set to a more random value.

The reacquisition flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the random number value for effect acquired from the random number generation IC 800 for effect is a value corresponding to "reselection" (that is, the range of "250 to 255"). If the reacquisition flag 223k is ON, the obtained random number value for effect corresponds to "reselection", which means that the random number value for effect needs to be obtained again from the random number generation IC 800 for effect. do. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that there is no need to reacquire the random number value for effect. This reacquisition flag 223k is set to ON when it is determined that the effect random number value acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is a value corresponding to "reselection" (S4304 in FIG. 69). Also, when a value within the range of "0 to 249" is obtained by reacquiring the random number for effect, it is set to OFF (see S4405 in FIG. 70).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 67, start-up processing 3 in the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment will be described.

In the processes of S1101 to S1111 of the start-up process 3 in the third embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1111 of the start-up process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment are executed. Further, in the startup process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1110 is completed, next, time information corresponding to the current time is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1131), and based on the acquired time information Then, a combination of 100 random numbers for effect to be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is selected from the effect counter initial value table 222c, and stored in the effect counter initial value table 222c (initial value is set) (S1132). ). When the process of S1132 is completed, the process proceeds to S1111.

In this start-up process 3, by selecting a combination of initial values prescribed in advance in the ROM 222 and setting them in the effect counter storage area 223i, one initial value of the effect random number is generated from the effect random number generation IC 800. Compared to the case of acquiring one, the initial value of the random number for effect can be quickly determined. Therefore, it is possible to make the transition to a state in which the player can start playing the game more quickly.

Next, main processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. S1201 to S1210 and S1212 to S1218 of the main process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment correspond to S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of to S1218 is executed.

In addition, in the main process 3 (see FIG. 68) in this embodiment, when the process of S1210 ends, when updating the effect random number value stored in the previous effect counter storage area 223i, When the random number value for effect is acquired, a reacquisition process for acquiring the random number value for effect again and updating the effect counter storage area 223i is performed (S1261), and the process proceeds to the process after S1212. The details of the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the announcement effect selection process 3 (S1406) in the second embodiment will be described. This notice effect selection process 3 (S1406) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) instead of the notice effect selection process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. Similar to the advance notice effect selection process (see FIG. 33) in the form, this is a process for selecting the type of notice effect from the effect random number value generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 and notifying the display control device 114 of it.

In this advance notice effect selection process 3 (S1406), first, among the 100 random effect values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, the random value for effect stored in the storage area (address) indicated by the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is displayed. A numerical value is acquired (S4301). Next, the register value of the production random number generation IC 800 is acquired as a new production random number value (S4302), and the acquired register value is a value corresponding to "reselection" (that is, within the range of "250 to 255"). It is determined whether or not there is (S4303).

In the process of S4303, if it is determined that the acquired register value (random number for effect) is a value corresponding to "reselection" (that is, within the range of "250 to 255") (S4303: Yes), By setting the acquisition flag 223k to ON, re-acquisition of the random number value for effect is set (S4304), and the process proceeds to S4306. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the register value obtained from the production random number generation IC 800 is outside the range of "reselection" (that is, within the range of "0 to 249") (S4303: No) , the acquired register value is stored as a new effect random number in the storage area (address) corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j in the effect counter storage area 223i (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306. do.

In the processing of S4306, the acquisition pointer 223j is updated by adding 1 (S4306), and it is determined whether or not the value of the acquisition pointer 223j after updating is greater than 100 (S4307). In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the value of the acquisition pointer 223j after updating is greater than 100 (S4307: Yes), the acquisition pointer 223j is initialized to 0 (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4309. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4307 that the value of the acquisition pointer 223j after updating is 100 or less (S4307: No), the process of S4308 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4309.

In the processing of S4309, it is determined whether or not the variable effect for setting the notice effect is a variable effect for informing a big hit (whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit) (S4309), If it is determined that there is (S4309: Yes), the foretelling effect selection table 222b1 for jackpot (see FIG. 11(b)) and the random number for effect (effect counter) obtained in the processing of S4301. A type is selected (S4310), and the process proceeds to S4312.

On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if it is determined that it is not a big hit (S4309: No), the advance notice effect selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 11(c)) and the random value for effect acquired in the process of S4301 ( (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4312. In the process of S4312, a notice effect command is set based on the result of selection of the notice effect (S4312), and this process ends.

Next, the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, this reacquisition process (S1261) is performed when the effect random number value corresponding to "reselection" is acquired when updating the effect random number value stored in the previous effect counter storage area 223i. , is a process for acquiring the effect random number value again and updating the effect counter storage area 223i.

In this reacquisition processing (S1261), first, it is determined whether or not the reacquisition flag is on (S4401). exit. On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the reacquisition flag 223k is ON (S4401: Yes), the register value (random value for effect) is acquired from the random number generation IC 800 for effect (S4402). Next, it is determined whether the register value acquired in the processing of S4402 is a value corresponding to "reselection" (that is, "250 to 255") (S4403), and the value corresponding to "reselection" is determined. If so (S4403: Yes), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the acquired register value is outside the range of "reselection" (that is, "0 to 249") (S4403: No), the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is read, The register value (random number for effect) obtained in the process of S4402 is stored in the storage area (address) of the effect counter storage area 223i corresponding to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the read value (S4404). Next, the reacquisition flag 223k is set to OFF (S4405), and this processing ends.

With this reacquisition processing (S1261), only the effect random number value outside the range of "reselection" from the effect random number generation IC 800 can be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect random number value read from the counter storage area 223i from becoming a value corresponding to "reselection". Therefore, it is possible to always select (determine) one of the types of advance notice effects (prediction effects A to C) by the process of selecting one advance notice effect, so that the processing time can be shortened.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of random number values for effect are stored in advance in the effect counter storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223. A lottery (decision) of the announcement performance is executed using the random number for performance. By storing a plurality of (100) random numbers in advance, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation where the random number is not stored in the production counter storage area 223i, so that the announcement production is determined each time. A determination (judgment) can be made normally in the process for. In addition, each time the stored random number is used to determine the notice effect, the used random value is discarded and a new random value is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800, and the effect counter storage area 223i is overwritten. is configured to By sequentially overwriting (updating) the content, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the same random number from being repeatedly used for determination, so that the randomness of the effect random number can be ensured.

Also, the effect counter storage area 223i is controlled so as to store only values outside the range of random numbers for which "reselection" is determined (that is, random numbers within the range of "0 to 249"). . By configuring in this way, if one random value is acquired from among the predetermined number of random values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, the type of the notice effect can be obtained only by executing the determination of the notice effect once. can be determined (that is, any of the advance notice effects A to C can be determined without determining "reselection"). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for processing for determining the type of the advance notice performance, so that the display control device 114 can be reliably notified of the type of the notice performance before the start timing of the advance notice performance.

Further, in this embodiment, the initial value of the random number value for effect to be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i when the power is turned on is specified in the effect counter initial value table 222c of the ROM 222. Among them, any combination of initial values defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c is transferred to the effect counter storage area 223i. In addition, all random number values for effect specified in the effect counter initial value table 222c are values within the range ("0 to 249") of any of the judgment results (one of the advance notice effects A to C is determined). value within the range). By configuring in this way, the time required to store the initial values in the effect counter storage area 223i can be shortened compared to the case where the initial values are obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 one by one. In the case where the initial values are obtained one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800, each time a random value is obtained, it is determined whether or not the value corresponds to "reselection". , a new random number must be obtained until the random number falls within the range (within the range of "0 to 249") that results in one of the judgment results. By shortening the time for storing a predetermined number (100) of the initial values of random numbers for effect in the effect counter storage area 223i, the period until the pachinko machine 10 can be played can be shortened.

In this embodiment, 100 random numbers are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, but the number is not limited to 100 and can be arbitrarily determined.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of random numbers (so-called hardware random numbers) generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. do not have. For example, a predetermined number (for example, 100) of random numbers generated by software processing (so-called software random numbers) may be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. A software random number is generally incremented by one during software processing. Therefore, if the value of the software random number is obtained again in order to re-randomize the lottery results, there is a high possibility that the random number will be a value that has not been sufficiently updated. In other words, it is not possible to obtain a random value that is a random value. Therefore, by storing the random number in advance in the effect counter storage area 223i as in the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain a random number even when the lottery result is re-lottered.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first to third embodiments, when the startup winning is detected, various information (various counter values) used for special symbol lottery is acquired, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. is detected, the information (the value of the second winning random number counter C4) used for the lottery for the normal symbol is acquired. That is, it is configured to execute different acquisition operations depending on whether the start winning is detected or the passage of the through gate 67 is detected.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, both when the start winning is detected and when the passage of the through gate 67 is detected, all the random numbers are collectively obtained, It is configured to use a necessary random number value for the lottery (judgment) according to. By adopting a configuration in which random numbers are collectively read irrespective of whether the player has started winning a prize or has passed through the through gate 67, the random number acquisition operation can be performed during debugging (operation verification), etc., at the development stage of the pachinko machine 10. can be checked together.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 are input to the main controller 110. It is electrically connected to the output port 205, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and some processing is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 71, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, for the input/output port 205 of the main control unit 110 special figure random number generation IC900 and general figure random number generation IC901 are electrically connected. The special random number generation IC 900 and the general random number generation IC 901 are the same as the ICs with the same names provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, various counter values in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, in this embodiment, the value of each register provided in the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 (first per random number register R1, first per type register R2, stop Type selection register R3, fluctuation type register RS1, second winning random number register R4) are used for various lottery random numbers (first winning random number counter C1 in the first embodiment, first winning type counter C2, stop type selection A counter C3, a variation type counter CS1, and a second hit random number counter C4) are obtained and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Also, these counter values are collectively acquired from each IC at the same timing and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p.

When the value of each register is collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p by detecting the start winning, among the stored register values (random numbers), the first per random number register R1, the first Each value of the hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 is stored in the empty area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when the value of each register is collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p by detecting the ball entering the through gate 67, the value of the second winning random number register R4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. is stored in the empty area of

All register values (random values) are collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p irrespective of the timing of acquiring the register value, so that when acquiring the register value, which register can be omitted, the register value (random value) can be quickly stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Also, in the debugging (operation verification) at the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to collectively check the acquisition operation of the random number value (register value).

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. As shown in FIG. 73, the RAM203 in the fourth embodiment is provided with a special figure continuous clear counter 203n in addition to the configuration of the RAM203 in the first embodiment. Further, instead of the counter buffer 203y provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, a counter temporary storage area 203p is provided.

The special symbol continuous clear counter 203n is the continuous number of batch acquisition of various register values based on the passage of the through gate 67 (that is, the special symbol lottery is not performed, and the normal symbol lottery is continuously performed. This is a counter for counting the number of times As described above, in the present embodiment, the counter value (register value) used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery is configured to be collectively acquired regardless of the acquisition trigger. For this reason, passage through the through gate 67, in which the conditions for obtaining the counter value (register value) are relatively easy to be established, is intentionally generated, and among the obtained random numbers (register values), the first winning lottery used for the big winning lottery is generated. There is a possibility that the value of the random number register R1 will be illegally analyzed from the outside. If this fraudulent act is executed, the tendency of the register value update in the special figure random number generation IC 900 will be analyzed until the timing of the register value corresponding to the big win, and there is a risk that the big win will be illegally assigned. . In order to prevent this fraudulent act, in this embodiment, the number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 continuously is counted by the special figure continuous clear counter 203n, and if the count value exceeds a predetermined number of times, it is illegal. It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of action and set an error display. As a result, it is possible to analyze the timing at which the random number value corresponding to the big win is acquired, and prevent (suppress) the cheating of winning the big win.

This special figure continuous clear counter 203n has an initial value set to 0, and in through gate passage processing 4 (see FIG. 75), among the counter values (register values) stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, Each time the value of the second hit random number register R4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the value is incremented by one (see S664 in FIG. 75). On the other hand, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74), each time the various counter values (register values) used for the special symbol lottery are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, they are initialized to 0 (see FIG. 74). (see S463).

Counter temporary storage area 203p, as described above, is a storage area for temporarily storing the register value (random value) obtained from the special figure random number generation IC900 and the general figure random number generation IC901. Various register values (random values) stored in this counter temporary storage area 203p are stored in the corresponding storage area (special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) depending on the opportunity to acquire the value ).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, control processing of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 74, the start winning process 4 (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process 4 in the fourth embodiment. This starting winning process 4 (S105) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) instead of the starting winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment.

Of the starting winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, each process of S401 to S405 is the same as each process of S401 to S405 of the starting winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. In addition, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in this embodiment, after executing the process of S401, each value of the first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the second hit random number register R4 is changed to a special figure. They are obtained from the random number generation IC 900 and the random number generation IC 901 for the normal figure, respectively, and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p provided in the RAM 203 (S461).

In addition, in the starting winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in this embodiment, when the process of S405 ends, the first winning random number register R1 and the first winning type register R2 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the process of S461 , each value of the stop type selection register R3 is transferred to the empty area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S462). Then, after initializing the value of the special figure continuation clear counter 203n to 0 (S463), the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S464), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, through gate passage processing 4 (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 4 in the fourth embodiment. This through gate passage processing 4 (see FIG. 75) is processing executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) in place of the through gate passage processing (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment.

In the through-gate passing process 4 (S107), the processes of S601 to S604 are the same as the processes of S601 to S604 of the through-gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Further, in the through gate passage processing 4 (see FIG. 75) in this embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in the processing of S601 (S601: Yes), then the first hit random number register R1 , Each value of the first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, the second hit random number register R4 is obtained from the special figure random number generation IC900 and the general figure random number generation IC901, respectively, and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p (S661).

Further, in the through-gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75) in this embodiment, when the process of S604 is completed, the second hit random number register R4 is is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S662). Then, each register value stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S663), and 1 is added to the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n (S664).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure continuation clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665). If the value of the special figure continuation clear counter 203n is not 10 or more (S665: No), this process is terminated as it is. If the value of the special figure continuation clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665: Yes), an error command is set (S666) and this process is terminated.

In this way, by configuring so as to notify an error when the lottery of normal symbols is continuously executed 10 times or more, among the register values collectively acquired upon passage of the through gate 67 , the fraudulent act of analyzing the value of the first random number register R1 can be prevented (suppressed). More specifically, as described above, in the present embodiment, the counter value (register value) used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery is configured to be acquired collectively regardless of the acquisition trigger. . For this reason, passage through the through gate 67, in which the conditions for obtaining the counter value (register value) are relatively easy to be established, is intentionally generated, and among the obtained random numbers (register values), the first winning lottery used for the big winning lottery is generated. There is a possibility that the value of the random number register R1 will be illegally analyzed from the outside. If this fraudulent act is executed, the tendency of the register value update in the special figure random number generation IC 900 will be analyzed until the timing of the register value corresponding to the big win, and there is a risk that the big win will be illegally assigned. . In order to prevent this fraudulent act, in this embodiment, the number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 continuously is counted by the special figure continuous clear counter 203n, and if the count value exceeds a predetermined number of times, it is illegal. It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of action and set an error display. As a result, it is possible to analyze the timing at which the random number value corresponding to the big win is acquired, and prevent (suppress) the cheating of winning the big win.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, all the register values (random values) are collectively processed regardless of whether the start winning is detected or the passage of the through gate 67 is detected. It is configured to be acquired and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, and transferred to a storage area (either the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) according to the detected content. . All the register values (random values) are collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p irrespective of the timing of acquiring the register values (random values), so that when acquiring the register values Since it is possible to omit the process of determining whether a value (random value) should be obtained by designating a register, the register value (random value) can be quickly stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. In addition, in the debugging (operation verification) at the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to collectively check the acquisition operation of the register value (random value).

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the switch reading process (S101 in FIG. 19) executed at a specific opportunity of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), the start winning of the game ball and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected. Detecting. Then, when the start winning prize is detected, the register value of each random number generation IC (special figure random number generation IC 900 and general figure random number generation IC 901) is acquired in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74), and the through gate 67 is detected, the register value of each random number generation IC is obtained in through gate passage processing 4 (see FIG. 75). Here, each register value in each random number generation IC is updated with a random value stored twice in 10 μs (period of 200 kHz). This update interval (time) is set after the register value (random value) of each random number generation IC is obtained in the starting winning process 4 (see FIG. 74), and the value of each random number generation IC in the through gate passing process 4 (see FIG. is shorter than the processing time until the register value (random value) of is acquired. As a result, in the same timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), even if the start winning of the game ball and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected, the register values ( random value) and the register value (random value) acquired based on passage through the through gate 67 can be made different.

In the present embodiment, the random number generation IC is configured to update the stored random number twice every 10 μs (cycle of 200 kHz), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a random number generation IC that can update the random number value at the timing of acquiring the random number value from the main controller 110 may be used. That is, a random number generation IC that can update and generate random numbers at arbitrary timing may be used. As a result, the frequency of updating and generating random numbers can be minimized, and power consumption can be reduced. In addition, the random number generation IC 900 for the special figure and the random number generation IC 901 for the general figure may of course use random number generation ICs with different update timings. For example, the random number generation IC 900 for the special figure is updated once every 1 μs (cycle of 1 MHz), and the random number generation IC 901 for the normal figure is updated once every 2 μs (cycle of 500 kHz). may be

In this embodiment, the random number generation IC 900 for the special figure and the random number generation IC 901 for the general figure are used as the random number generation IC, and the random numbers generated by each are configured to be collectively obtainable. It is not limited to two types. More than three types of random number generation ICs may be used, or one type may be used. For example, one type of random number generation IC is used, that is, one random number generation IC is used. As a result, in the process of collectively obtaining each random value from the random number generation IC, each random value can be obtained only by accessing one random number generation IC, compared to obtaining each random value from a plurality of random number generation ICs. It can be acquired in a batch, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. In the above-described fourth embodiment, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) and the through gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75), when the condition for acquiring the random number (register value) is satisfied, the special figure random number It was configured to collectively acquire all the random numbers (register values) generated by the generation IC 900 and the random number generation IC 901 for normal figures.

In addition to this, in this modified example, when the condition for obtaining a random number is satisfied, the acquisition of the random number (register value) and the storage of the random number are executed in the same process (winning process). is configured as As a result, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only one process (winning process), so the burden on the designer during development can be reduced. In addition, in the switch reading process (S101), if it is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 and passed through the through gate 67, the random value ( Register values) can be used to store random numbers corresponding to each, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
First, timer interrupt processing 5 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 5 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. The same parts as those of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted, and only different parts are described.

In this timer interrupt process 5, similarly to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) of the first embodiment described above, first, the switch reading process of S101 is executed, and then the winning process is executed (SS161). Next, a special symbol variation process is executed (S104), a normal symbol variation process is executed (S106), a launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed. (S109), the timer interrupt process 5 is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the winning process (161), which is one process in the timer interrupt process 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the winning process (S161) in the modification of the fourth embodiment.

This prize winning process (S161) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 76) to determine whether or not the player has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or passed through the through gate 67. Then, when there is a prize or passage, various random numbers are collectively obtained from each random number generation IC (random number generation IC 900 for special figures and random number generation IC 901 for general figures), and the first entry using the various random numbers This is a process for executing a process corresponding to winning the ball opening 64 (starting winning) and passing through the through gate 67 . By this winning process (S161), in the same timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), when the start winning of the game ball and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected, the starting winning and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected. The processing load can be reduced compared to the case where each register value (random value) is acquired from each random number generation IC based on the above.

When the winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has not won the first ball entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt process 5 is returned to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501: Yes), the first winning random number register R1, the first winning type register R2, and the stop type selection register R3. , Each value of the second random number register R4 is acquired from the special figure random number generation IC900 and the general figure random number generation IC901, and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p provided in the RAM 203 (S4502). Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance (S4503). If the ball has not entered the first ball entrance (S4503: No), the process of S4504 to S4508 is not executed, and the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first winning hole (S4503: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (number of times of holding variable display in special symbols N) is acquired (S4504). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S4505).

Then, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not less than 4 (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S4503: Yes), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S4505: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S4506). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S4507), and in the process of S4501, the first hit random number register R1 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, the second Each value of the per type register R2 and the stop type register R3 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a (S4508), and in S4509. Go to processing. In addition, in the process of S4508, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of S4509, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S4509). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S4509: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S4510). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S4511).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S4509: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S4511 : No), the process proceeds to S4514. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S4509: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S4511: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d 1 is added to the value (M) (S4512). Then, in the process of S4502, the value of the second hit random number register R4 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514. In the process of S4513, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S4514, the value of the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S4514), and then the process ends.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when the condition for obtaining a random number is met, the acquisition of a random number (register value) and the configured to store and perform As a result, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only one process (winning process), so the burden on the designer during development can be reduced. Also, in the switch reading process (S101), if it is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 and passed through the through gate 67, the random value ( Register values) can be used to store random numbers corresponding to each, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 84. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, when the announcement effect is selected from the announcement effect selection table 222b, "reselection" is selected at a predetermined ratio (6/256).

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when determining the aspect of the variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 222a, it is configured so that "reselection" can be determined. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from main controller 110 is super reach (60 seconds), "reselection" is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in this embodiment, the ratio of "reselection" is determined differently depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a loss. Then, when determining the effect mode of super ready-to-win, different mode effects are executed according to the number of times the "re-selection" is determined in succession. As a result, it is possible to predict whether the game is a big win or a loss according to the mode of performance at the time of super ready-to-win, so that the player can pay more attention to the performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 78(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 78(a), the ROM 222 of this embodiment is provided with a pseudo-fluctuation complement effect selection table 222d in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment. This pseudo-fluctuation complementary effect selection table 222d is a data table that defines the mode of pseudo-fluctuation display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when Super Reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. is. Also, the advance notice effect selection table 222b provided in the ROM 222 in the first embodiment is eliminated.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). As shown in FIG. 78(b), in the RAM 223 of this embodiment, a variable reselection flag 223m and a variable reselection counter 223n are added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. 223e and the advance notice reselection counter 223f are deleted.

The variable reselection flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not "reselection" has been determined from the super reach selection table 222a3. If this variable reselection flag 223m is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined from the super reach selection table 222a3 (the type (mode) of super reach is not determined), and if it is off, It means that "reselection" has not been determined (the type (mode) of super reach has been determined). The initial value of this variable reselection flag 223m is set to OFF, and in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 83) for selecting the type of super reach, "reselection" is determined from the super reach effect selection table 222a3. is set to ON (see S5007 in FIG. 83). Then, in the variable reselection process (see FIG. 84), when one of the super reach types (super reach types A to C) is determined, it is set to off (see S5110 in FIG. 84). By referring to this variable reselection flag 223m, when "reselection" is determined from the super reach effect selection table 222a3, reselection of super reach type (reselection) in the variable reselection process (see FIG. 84) lottery) can be carried out.

The variable re-selection counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of times the process of re-selecting (re-drawing) the type of variable effect continues. That is, it is a counter for counting the number of times "reselection" is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3 after receiving the variation pattern command and before determining the type of variation pattern. As described above, the present embodiment is configured such that different modes of variation patterns are set according to the number of times "reselection" is determined. The number of times "reselection" is determined is determined by the value of this variable reselection counter 223n (see S5106 in FIG. 84). The variable reselection counter 223n is incremented by 1 each time the variable reselection process is executed (see S5103 in FIG. 84). On the other hand, it is initialized to 0 when any variation pattern aspect is selected in the variation reselection process (see S5109 in FIG. 84).

Next, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79(a) to (d). First, FIG. 79(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222a in this embodiment, when the variation pattern command notified from the main controller 110 is a command indicating complete deviation, the display mode of the variation pattern A normal variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selection, a normal reach selection table 222a2 for selecting the display mode of the variation pattern when normal reach is notified by the variation pattern command, and a super reach is notified by the variation pattern command In the case, the super reach selection table 222a3 for selecting the display mode of the variation pattern, and the special reach selection table 222a4 for selecting the display mode of the variation pattern when the special reach is notified by the variation pattern command. It is configured.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79(b) to (d), the details of the super reach selection table 222a3 among the data tables constituting the variation pattern selection table 222a will be described. As shown in FIG. 79(b), as the super reach selection table 222a3, the super reach selection table 222a3a for big wins referred to when the winning super reach is notified, and the super reach selection table 222a3a is referred to when the losing super reach is notified. It is composed of a super reach selection table 222a3b for out. In each table, variation pattern types (super reach types A to C) are defined in association with random number values for effect.

As shown in FIG. 79(c), in the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a, the super reach type A is associated with the random number value for effect in the range of "0 to 60", and the range of "61 to 120". is associated with the super reach type B, and the range of "121 to 180" is associated with the super reach type C. Further, the remaining range of "181 to 255" is associated with "reselection". If one of the super reach types is assigned to the entire range of the random number value for effect "0 to 255", the ratio of each super reach type will be, for example, 3 due to the restriction on the number of random number values for effect. It cannot be evenly distributed (1:1:1) for the types of types. That is, the ratio of each super reach type cannot be set freely.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by setting 60 random numbers each for determining the super reach types A to C, and distributing the remaining random numbers to "reselection", each of the super reach types A to C is determined (selection ratio of super reach types A to C is 1:1:1).

In addition, the selection ratio of each super reach type is not limited to 1:1:1. An arbitrary selection ratio can be obtained by determining a predetermined cardinal number and allocating random numbers for effect that are multiples of the cardinal number to each super reach type. For example, it is assumed that the predetermined cardinal number is 30, and the selection ratio is super reach type A:super reach type B:super reach type C=1:2:4. In this case, 30 (30×1) effect random numbers are assigned to super reach type A, 60 (30×2) effect random numbers are assigned to super reach type B, and super For reach type C, 120 (30×4) random number values for effect may be assigned. Also, the remaining 46 random numbers (256-30-60-120) for effect may be assigned to "reselection". By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize the selection ratio as set (that is, 1:2:4) without generating fractions.

As shown in FIG. 79(d), in the failure super reach selection table 222a3b, the super reach type A is associated with the random number value for effect in the range of "0 to 80", and the range of "81 to 160". is associated with the super reach type B, and the range of "161 to 240" is associated with the super reach type C. Further, the remaining range of "241 to 255" is associated with "reselection". That is, 80 random number values for effect are assigned to each super reach type. As a result, the selection ratio of each super reach type can be strictly set to 1:1:1 in the same manner as in the big hit super reach selection table 222a3a.

It should be noted that the winning super reach selection table 222a3b is configured so that the probability of "reselection" being determined is lower (at the time of the big win: 76/256, at the time of losing: 16/256). Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute an effect with a high expectation of a big win as "reselection" is continuously determined. Therefore, if "reselection" is likely to be selected in spite of the loss, the player is likely to be in a situation where the failure is finally reported despite the highly anticipated performance being executed, which causes the player to feel dissatisfied. There is a risk of getting caught. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability of "re-selection" being determined in the case of a loss is made lower than in the case of a big win, so that the player will have an excessive sense of expectation in the case of a loss. is configured to prevent (suppress). As a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 80(a) to (c), details of the above-described pseudo-fluctuation complementary effect selection table 222d will be described. As shown in FIG. 80(a), the pseudo-fluctuation complementary effect selection table 222d is composed of at least a big hit complementary effect selection table 222d1 and a loss complementary effect selection table 222d2. This pseudo-fluctuation complementary effect selection table 222d is a data table for determining the display mode for 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to super reach.

In this embodiment, when "re-selection" is determined when selecting the 60-second variable effect mode corresponding to Super Reach, 15 seconds of pseudo-variable effect (after the pattern is displayed, "3 ”, “4”, and “1” (a so-called “chance eye”) is set. The pseudo-variation complement effect selection table 222d is a data table for selecting the display mode after the pseudo-variation display for 15 seconds is completed.

The jackpot complementary effect selection table 222d1 is data that defines the number of pseudo-variation displays displayed in a period of 15 to 40 seconds after the start of variation of the winning super reach in association with the number of determinations of "reselection". is a table. As shown in FIG. 80(b), the number of times that "reselection" is continuously determined is within the range of "0 to 3" until the winning super reach mode is determined from the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a. If so, the complementary effect A is set as the display mode at the time of super ready-to-win. In this supplementary performance A, pseudo-variation display (pseudo-stop) is not performed even once for 15 to 40 seconds after the start of variation, and eventually variation display is performed in which symbols indicating a big win are stopped and displayed. It is an aspect that That is, during the first 15 seconds after the start of the variation, the variation display is performed a total of two times: a pseudo variation display in which the chance number is stopped and displayed, and a variation display in which the symbols indicating the big win are stopped and displayed. be.

In addition, when the number of "re-selection" decisions is in the range of "4 to 6", complementary effect B is selected in which a pseudo-variation display (pseudo stop) is performed once between 15 and 40 seconds after the start of variation. In the range of "7 to 9" for the number of "reselection" determinations, complementary effect C is selected in which a pseudo-variation display (pseudo-stop) is performed twice between 15 and 40 seconds after the start of variation. In the range where the number of determinations of "reselection" is "10 or more", complementary effect D is selected in which pseudo-variation display (pseudo-stop) is performed three times between 15 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of variation. be.

As described above, winning super reach has a higher probability of being “reselected” when determining the type of super reach. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(b), the more "reselection" is determined in succession, the more times the pseudo variation display (pseudo stop) is performed. Therefore, as the number of pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) executions increases, the player's expectation for the big win can be raised, so it is possible to draw attention to the number of pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) executions. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Complementary effect selection table for loss 222d2 is data that defines the number of pseudo-variation displays displayed in a period of 15 to 40 seconds after the start of variation of super reach for loss in association with the number of determinations of "reselection". is a table. As shown in FIG. 80(c), the number of times that "reselection" is continuously determined is in the range of "0 to 3" until the mode of loss super reach is determined from the loss super reach selection table 222a3b. If there is, no pseudo-variation display (pseudo-stop) will be performed even once for 15 to 40 seconds after the start of variation, and finally, a variation display will be executed in which the symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed. A is selected. That is, during the first 15 seconds after the start of the variation, the variation display is performed two times in total: a pseudo variation display in which the chance number is stopped and displayed, and a variation display in which the symbols indicating the failure are stopped and displayed. be.

In addition, when the number of "re-selection" decisions is in the range of "4 to 6", complementary effect B is selected in which a pseudo-variation display (pseudo stop) is performed once between 15 and 40 seconds after the start of variation. In the range where the number of times of "reselection" is determined is "7 or more", complementary effect C is selected in which pseudo-variation display (pseudo-stop) is performed twice between 15 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of variation. be. That is, in the off super reach, the total of the pseudo-variation display performed in 15 seconds after the start of variation and the pseudo-variation display performed in the period of 15 to 40 seconds (the number of times of display of the chance ) is configured to be a maximum of 3 times (one less than the maximum number of hit super reach). Therefore, in 1 super reach, when the chance number is displayed four times, it is determined that a big win will occur, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of pseudo-variation displays (the number of times the chance number is displayed). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 84. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 81, main processing 6 (see FIG. 81) of the audio ramp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described.

S1201 to S1210, S1212 and S1214 to S1218 of the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment correspond to S1201 to S1210, S1212, , and the same processes as those of S1214 to S1218 are executed. In addition, in the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1210 ends, then, when "reselection" is determined in the previous selection process of the super reach mode, the effect abuse A variable re-selection process is executed to acquire a new numerical value and select the mode of super reach again (S1291), and the process proceeds to S1212. Details of the variable reselection process (S1291) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the main process 6 (see FIG. 84) in this embodiment, after executing the command determination process (S1212), the variable display setting process 6 is executed (S1213), and the process proceeds to S1214 and thereafter. This variable display setting process 6 (S1213) is executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Details of this variable display setting process 6 (S1213) will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG.

FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) described above. This variable display setting process 6 (S1213) is received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, as in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is a process of setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command.

S1401 to S1405 and S1407 to S1410 of the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) in the fifth embodiment correspond to S1401 to S1405 and S1405 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. , and the same processes as those of S1407 to S1410 are executed. In addition, in the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) in the present embodiment, after the process of S1403 is completed, the detailed aspect of the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern (variation time) extracted in the process of S1403. is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds from S1404 onwards. Details of this variation pattern selection process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1431) described above. By this variation pattern selection process (S1431), the detailed display mode of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 is determined (selected). In this variation pattern selection process (S1431), first, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is acquired as a effect random number value (S5001). Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S1403 of the variation display setting processing 6 (see FIG. 82) is a super reach variation pattern (S5002).

In the processing of S5002, if it is determined that the variation pattern notified by the current variation pattern command is not super reach (S5002: No), the table corresponding to the extracted variation type is changed to the variation pattern table 222a Selection is made from each table, and the display mode of the variation pattern is determined (selected) based on the selected table and the random number for effect acquired in the processing of S5001 (S5004), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if it is determined that it is a variation pattern of super reach (S5002: Yes), the random number for effect obtained by the process of S5001 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3, and the effect for effect Determine (select) the aspect of the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the random number (S5003). As described above, if the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is the winning super reach, the big winning super reach selection table 222a3a and the effect random number are compared. On the other hand, if the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is a failure super reach, the failure super reach selection table 222a3b and the effect random number are compared.

When the processing of S5003 ends, it is determined whether or not "reselection" is determined (selected) from the big hit super reach selection table 222a3a or the losing super reach selection table 222a3b (S5005), and "reselection (S5005: Yes), a pseudo-variation pattern (15-second pseudo-variation display stopped and displayed at the chance) is selected (S5006), and variation The reselection flag 223m is set to ON (S5007), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5005, when it is determined (selected) from the big hit super reach selection table 222a3a or the losing super reach selection table 222a3b is not "reselection" (S5005: No) , Selects (determines) the aspect of executing the 60-second variation display (Long Super Reach aspect) without performing the pseudo variation display as the display aspect of the current variation pattern (S5008), and ends this processing. .

In this way, in the variation pattern selection process (S1431), after receiving the variation pattern command, the variation pattern to be selected is varied depending on whether or not "reselection" is determined at the time of selection of the first variation pattern mode. (15 seconds pseudo fluctuation pattern aspect or 60 seconds long super reach aspect). By setting a short pseudo variation pattern for 15 seconds when "reselection" is selected, it is possible to reliably determine (select) the aspect of the variation pattern during the 15 seconds. When "reselection" is selected, the variation reselection process (S1291), which is repeated until the variation pattern mode is selected, is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) Therefore, even if reselection is repeated up to 15000 times in 15 seconds, the variation pattern can be selected. The probability of "re-selection" being determined is 76/256 for the super reach selection table for big win 222a3a and 16/256 for the super reach selection table for loss 222a3b. Therefore, the probability of 5,000 consecutive “reselections” being determined is about 1/2.5×10 to the 7911th power, even in the case of a high-probability jackpot, which is statistically so low that it can be ignored. . Therefore, by setting the aspect of the pseudo variation pattern for 5 seconds when "reselection" is determined, it is possible to secure time to execute the process of reselecting the aspect of the variation pattern. In addition, the 15-second pseudo variable performance should be set in the same manner as the pseudo variable performance that may be executed 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the variation (a manner in which the chance number is stopped and displayed). Thus, it is possible to set the start of the effect in which the chance numbers are displayed continuously.

Next, the details of the variable reselection process (S1291) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This variable reselection process (S1291) is, as described above, when "reselection" is determined in the process of selecting the mode of the previous super reach, the random number for effect is newly acquired and the super reach is renewed. This is processing for selecting an aspect.

In this variation reselection process (S1291), first, it is determined whether or not the variation reselection flag 223m is on (S5101), and if it is determined to be off (S5101), the variation pattern aspect is reselected. Since it means that there is no need to do so, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is ON (S5101), the previous fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 83) or fluctuation reselection process (see FIG. 84) in the fluctuation pattern Since "reselection" is determined (selected) when selecting the mode, it means that the mode of the variation pattern is undetermined. (S5102), and then by adding 1 to the value of the variable reselection counter 223n (S5103), the number of times "reselection" has been determined (selected) in succession is updated.

When the processing of S5103 ends, then, the effect random number value newly acquired by the processing of S5103 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3 (see FIGS. 79(b) to (d)), and the effect random A variation pattern corresponding to the numerical value is determined (selected) (S5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination (selection) result in the process of S5104 is "reselection" (S5105).

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, if it is determined that the determination (selection) is not "reselection" (that is, any of the super reach types A to C has been determined (selected)) (S5105: No) , By comparing the value of the variable reselection counter 223n and the pseudo-variable complementary effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 80(a) to (c)), the pseudo- A mode of effect (pseudo-fluctuation supplementary effect) in which the chance number is stop-displayed 0 to 3 times by dynamic display is selected (S5106).

When the processing of S5106 is finished, next, the mode of super reach for 20 seconds (mode of short super reach) corresponding to the type of the selected pseudo-fluctuation complementary effect is selected (S5107). In the short super reach, the combination of stop symbols finally indicating the loss is stopped and displayed in the case of the loss super reach, and the stop pattern indicating the big win is finally stopped and displayed in the case of the winning super reach. It should be noted that the mode of this short super reach is started from the state of symbol fluctuation. In accordance with this, each of the pseudo-fluctuation complementary effects (complementary effects A to D) is displayed in a state in which the symbols are fluctuating at the end of the execution period (40 seconds after the start of fluctuation). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the switching from the pseudo-fluctuation complement effect to the short super reach mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having a sense of incongruity with the display mode at the time of super ready-to-win, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S5107, the display variation pattern addition command for notifying the display control device 114 of the mode of the pseudo-variation complementary effect selected in the process of S5106 and the mode of the short super reach selected in the process of S5107 (S5108), initializes the variable reselection counter 223n to 0 (S5109), sets the variable reselection flag 223m to OFF (S5110), and terminates this process.

With this variable reselection process (S1291), it is possible to display different modes of variation patterns according to the number of times "reselection" is determined, so that various effects can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, when the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the super reach is notified by the variation pattern command, and the mode of the variation pattern is selected in the voice ramp control device 113, It is configured such that "reselection" is determined with a predetermined probability. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from main controller 110 is super reach (60 seconds), "reselection" is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in this embodiment, the ratio of "reselection" is determined differently depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a loss. Then, when determining the effect mode of super ready-to-win, different mode effects are executed according to the number of times the "re-selection" is determined in succession. As a result, it is possible to predict whether the game is a big win or a loss according to the mode of performance at the time of super ready-to-win, so that the player can pay more attention to the performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate.

In addition, in this embodiment, when "reselection" is determined (selected) in the variation pattern selection process, it is configured to set a short pseudo variation pattern of 15 seconds. As a result, it is possible to reliably determine (select) the aspect of the variation pattern during the 15 seconds. Furthermore, since this 15-second production is set to the same type of production as the pseudo-fluctuation complementary production set after the elapse of the period, the 15-second production and the subsequent pseudo-variable complementary production are related to each other. It is possible to display a performance that Therefore, the player's interest in the content of the performance can be attracted, and the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when "reselection" is determined, the pseudo-variation display is performed once in the first 15 seconds after the start of variation, but the pseudo-variation display is It is not limited to once, and may be executed twice or more.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of pseudo-variation effects (the number of display times of the chance eye) is four, but the number of display times can be determined arbitrarily.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

Of course, each of the above-described embodiments and control examples, or a combination thereof, may be used. Furthermore, although it is composed of a plurality of controllers, it may be composed of one integrated controller or several integrated controllers.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (Re-lottery to be an integer ratio)
A generation means capable of updating and generating a judgment value within a predetermined range, an acquisition means acquiring the judgment value generated by the production means, and a predetermined setting for the judgment value acquired by the acquisition means A game machine comprising: determining means for determining whether the set value matches the set value; and control means for executing a process set corresponding to the set value when the determining means determines that the set value matches the set value. is determined to be a specific determination value different from the set value, the acquisition means acquires the determination value newly generated by the generation means. acquisition control means for controlling means, and the number set as the specific determination value is determined by: The game machine A1 is characterized in that the ratio of the number set in the setting value is set to be an integer.

Here, for example, there is known a gaming machine that executes various lotteries such as a lottery for winning or not based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole, a lottery for display effects, and the like. In such a lottery, it is determined whether or not the value of a judgment value (for example, a random number counter) matches a predetermined set value. In some cases, a set process (determining a mode of presentation, etc.) is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-331078). In this case, the ratio of the number of predetermined set values to the number of possible values of the judgment value (that is, the probability of various lottery results) is a fraction or a decimal number, and when converted into a percentage, the fraction (after the decimal point ) usually occurs. That is, the probabilities (percentages) of various lottery results could not be expressed as integers. However, in the development stage of the game machine, it is common to design the percentage of each lottery result as a percentage (percentage). For this reason, when the designer distributes the number of setting values that result in various lottery results at the development stage of the game machine, the probability of each lottery result designed in percentage (percentage) and the judgment value according to the percentage There was a possibility that it would be difficult for the designer to intuitively understand the correspondence relationship with the number. In other words, the design may become inefficient.

Also, when the probability (percentage) of each lottery result is announced, it is common to publish the numerical value converted into a percentage in many cases, but if the percentage has a fraction (below the decimal point), Depending on how the decimal point is rounded down, the total percentage may not be 100%.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is determined to be a specific determination value different from the set value, the determination value newly generated by the generation means is acquired. and the acquisition means is controlled by the acquisition control means. Here, the number set for the specific determination value is the ratio of the number set for the set value to the difference between the number of determination values within the predetermined range and the number set for the specific determination value. is set to be an integer.

As a result, the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is intuitively easy to understand, so there is an effect that the design can be efficiently carried out at the development stage of the game machine. Moreover, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is easier for the player to understand. In other words, there is an effect that the setting value can be preferably set.

In the game machine A1, the generation means updates the determination value in a shorter period than the shortest interval at which the acquisition means acquires the determination value.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the determination value is updated by the generation means in a shorter period than the shortest interval at which the acquisition means acquires the determination value, so the determination value is updated by the generation means. It is possible to prevent the acquisition unit from acquiring the same determination value multiple times before the determination is made. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress biased results of discrimination by the discriminating means.

A plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control means in the gaming machine A1 or A2, and one or more set values are set for each of the control processes that can be executed by the control means. A game machine A3 characterized in that the control means allocated to the game machine A3 executes the control processing corresponding to the set value determined by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of different control processes are set for the control process executed by the control means. One or a plurality of setting values are assigned to each control process executable by the control means. Then, control processing corresponding to the set value determined by the determination means is executed by the control means.

As a result, different control processes can be executed according to the determination result of the determination means, so there is an effect that a wide variety of control processes can be executed.

The number of setting values assigned to each of the control processes that can be executed by the control means in the game machine A3 corresponds to the difference between the number of determination values within the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value. A game machine A4 characterized in that the ratio is set to be an integer.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the number of set values assigned to each control process that can be executed by the control means is set to the number of determination values within a predetermined range and a specific determination value. Since the ratio with respect to the difference from the set number is set to be an integer, there is an effect that the design can be made more efficiently in the development stage of the game machine. Moreover, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is easier for the player to understand.

Consecutive number of times when the determination value is continuously determined to be the specific determination value without being determined by the determination means to match the predetermined set value in any one of the game machines A1 to A4 and a discrimination end means for terminating the discrimination by the discriminating means when the consecutive number counted by the number counting means reaches a specific number.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of consecutive times when the determination value is continuously determined to be the specific determination value without being determined by the determination means to match the predetermined set value is counted by the number counting means, and the number of times is counted. The discrimination by the discriminating means is terminated by the discrimination terminating means when the number of consecutive times counted by the means reaches the specific number.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as being unable to execute other control processes during the continuous determination of the specific determination value.

A gaming machine A6 comprising execution control means for causing the control means to execute specific control when the determination by the determination means is terminated by the determination end means in the game machine A5.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, when the determination by the determination means is terminated by the determination end means, the execution control means causes the control means to execute specific control. There is an effect that the control can be performed normally even when the determination is finished without the determination value matching the determined set value.

The number set as the specific determination value in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 is the difference between the number of determination values within the predetermined range and the number set as the specific determination value. The game machine A7 is characterized in that the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the number set to the specific judgment value is set to the number of judgment values within a predetermined range and the specific judgment value. Since the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation with respect to the difference in the number, it is possible to design more efficiently at the development stage of the game machine. There is Moreover, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is easier for the player to understand.

Display means for displaying a display effect in any one of game machines A1 to A7, and effect execution means for executing the display effect on the display means. A gaming machine A8 characterized in that, as a type, a type set corresponding to the set value is selected.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the following effects are produced. That is, the display effect is executed by the effect execution means for the display means for displaying the display effect. As the type of display effect executed by the effect executing means, a type set by the control means corresponding to the set value is selected.

As a result, there is an effect that the rate at which the display effect is selected can be set to a value that is easy for the player to understand.

A plurality of control means for repeatedly executing a plurality of control processes including discrimination by the discrimination means in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8 in accordance with a predetermined control procedure; is the specific determination value different from the set value, after executing another control process based on the predetermined control procedure, the determination value newly generated by the generating means A game machine A9 characterized in that it controls the acquisition means so as to acquire .

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of control processes including determination by the determination means are repeatedly executed by the multiple control means according to a predetermined control procedure. When it is determined that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value, another control process is executed based on a predetermined control procedure, and then a new determination value is generated by the generation means. The obtaining means is controlled by the obtaining control means so as to obtain the determined determination value.

As a result, when the acquired determination value is a specific determination value, it is possible to suppress acquisition of a new determination value without executing other control processing, thereby delaying other control processing. There is an effect that it can be executed normally without

<Feature B group> (Pseudo fluctuation starts on the sub side based on the passage of a certain interval)
Main control means for executing game control and peripheral control means for executing game control based on a control signal output from the main control means, wherein the main control means determines a judgment value within a predetermined range. generation means for updating and generating, acquisition means for acquiring the determination value based on the establishment of an acquisition condition from the generation means, and storage means for storing determination value information based on the determination value acquired from the acquisition means a number information signal generating means for generating a number information signal indicating the number of the stored judgment value information when the judgment value information is stored in the storage means; and the judgment value information obtained from the acquisition means. determination means for determining based on the establishment of the starting condition, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means, and the dynamic display period When the period information signal generating means for generating the period information signal indicating the dynamic display period determined by the determining means and the identification information indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means, it is advantageous to the player. and dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means during the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal received by the peripheral control means. and when a predetermined period of time elapses after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, the performance symbol is displayed on the display means on the condition that the judgment value information is stored in the storage means and dynamic display means for starting dynamic display.

Here, for example, there is a game machine in which a variable effect is started based on the winning of a game ball to a starting hole. If the winning is not suspended, the variable performance will start immediately after winning (for example, within 1 second). For example, it is usually started within 1 second (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-050734). In such a gaming machine, if the instruction to start the variable performance is delayed and the variable performance is not started promptly, the player will be given the impression that the gaming machine is not operating normally. There was a fear that it would give a sense of distrust.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means during the dynamic display period indicated by the received period information signal in the peripheral control means. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, an effect is displayed on the display means by the effect pattern dynamic display means on the condition that the judgment value information is stored in the storage means. Dynamic display of symbols is started.

As a result, when the predetermined period has passed without receiving the period information signal, the dynamic display of the performance symbols allows the player to recognize that the machine is operating normally. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress distrust of the player.

In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period determination means corresponds to the set value when the determination means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means matches a predetermined set value. The dynamic display period is determined, and when the main control means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value, a new determination value is generated by the generation means. acquisition control means for controlling the acquisition means so as to acquire the judgment value generated in the predetermined range, the number set in the specific judgment value is the number of judgment values in the predetermined range and the specific judgment A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the ratio of the number set as the set value is set to be an integer with respect to the difference from the number set as the value.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determining means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquiring means matches a predetermined set value, the dynamic display period corresponding to the set value is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Here, when the main control means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value, the determination value newly generated by the generation means is acquired. Means are controlled by acquisition control means. Then, the number set for the specific judgment value is the ratio of the number set for the set value to the difference between the number of judgment values within a predetermined range and the number set for the specific judgment value. is set to be an integer.

As a result, the ratio for determining the dynamic display period can be set to an integer, so when designing the ratio of the dynamic display period in the development stage of the game machine, it is possible to design efficiently. There is Moreover, there is an effect that the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is easier for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a plurality of the dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, and the dynamic display period can be determined by the dynamic display period determination means. One or a plurality of setting values are assigned to each of the target display periods, and the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period corresponding to the setting values determined by the determining means. A gaming machine B3 characterized by:

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means. One or more set values are assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means. A dynamic display period corresponding to the set value determined by the determination means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means.

Accordingly, different dynamic display periods can be determined according to the set values determined by the determining means, so that the determined dynamic display periods can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine B3, the number of the set values assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determination means is the number of the determination values within the predetermined range and the specific determination value. A game machine B4 characterized in that the ratio to the difference from the number set in the number is set to be an integer.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the number of set values assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determination means is the number of determination values within a predetermined range. and the number set to the specific determination value is set to be an integer, the ratio of determining each dynamic display period can be set to be an integer. Therefore, when designing the rate at which each dynamic display period is determined in the development stage of the game machine, there is an effect that the design can be performed efficiently. Moreover, there is an effect that the rate at which each dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is easier for the player to understand.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the peripheral control means does not receive the period information signal even after a specific period has passed since the dynamic display of the performance symbols was started by the dynamic display means. A game machine B5 characterized by comprising notification mode setting means for setting a specific notification mode when a game is played.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B4, the period information is displayed even after a specific period has passed since the dynamic display of the performance symbols was started by the performance symbol dynamic display means in the peripheral control means. When the signal is not received, the specific notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means, so that the player or the hall clerk recognizes that the period information signal is not received for the specific period by the specific notification mode. It has the effect of being able to

A gaming machine B6, wherein the specific period is shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal in the gaming machine B5.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the specific period is set to a period shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal. It is possible to suppress the continuation over the target display. Therefore, there is an effect that a failure of the period information signal can be reported earlier.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B6, the number set as the specific judgment value is the difference between the number of judgment values in the predetermined range and the number set as the specific judgment value. , a gaming machine B7 characterized in that the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B2 to B6, the number set to the specific judgment value is set to the number of judgment values within a predetermined range and the specific judgment value. When designing the ratio of the dynamic display period in the development stage of the game machine, since the ratio of the number set in the setting value is set to be an integer in percentage notation with respect to the difference from the number of In addition, there is an effect that the design can be performed more efficiently. Moreover, there is an effect that the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is easier for the player to understand.

In any one of game machines B2 to B7, when the determination means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value, The acquisition of the new determination value by the acquisition control means and the determination of the new determination value by the determination means are repeated until it is determined that the determination value matches one of the set values. A gaming machine B8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines B2 to B7, when the determining means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquiring means is a specific determination value different from the set value, , acquisition of a new determination value by the acquisition control means and determination of the new determination value by the determination means are repeated by the main control means until it is determined that the determination value matches one of the set values. A dynamic display time can be determined reliably. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the dynamic display is not executed in the peripheral control means.

<Characteristic group C> (determine and secure the production counter in advance)
generation means capable of updating and generating a determination value composed of values within a predetermined range; acquisition means for acquiring the determination value from the generation means based on the establishment of a first condition; and its acquisition means. storage means for storing the determination value acquired by the acquisition means; determination means for determining the determination value acquired by the acquisition means; and the determination value acquired by the acquisition means by the determination means is a specific determination value. acquisition control means for causing the acquisition means to acquire the newly generated determination value without storing the specific determination value in the storage means when it is determined that the determination value is determined as a control process determining means for determining a control process to be executed based on the determination value stored in the storage means; A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it is set as follows.

In the gaming machine C1, the storage means is configured to be capable of storing a predetermined upper limit number of the determination values, and when the upper limit number is exceeded, one of the already stored determination values is overwritten and stored. A game machine C2 characterized in that it is

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the gaming machine C1 or C2 is configured such that the first condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second condition.

Judgment value defining means for prescribing a predetermined number of the judgment values in any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, and the judgment values prescribed by the judgment value regulation means to the storage means on the basis of power-on. A gaming machine C4, further comprising storage control means for controlling storage, wherein the predetermined number of determination values are composed of values other than the specific determination values.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the game machine control process determination means determines one control process from a plurality of control processes, and one or a plurality of control processes are selected for each of the plurality of control processes. The determination values are assigned, and the number of determination values assigned to each of the plurality of control processes is the number of determination values that fall within the predetermined range and the specific determination value. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that the ratio to the difference from the number of is set to be an integer.

In any one of game machines C1 to C5, the game machine C6 is characterized in that the generation means updates the determination value in a shorter period of time than the shortest interval at which the acquisition means acquires the determination value.

<Characteristic group D> (pseudo replay after pulling replay)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a ball entering information acquisition means for acquiring ball entering information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering means, and the information obtained by the entering ball information acquiring means. Based on the entered ball information, when the discrimination means for executing discrimination and the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means and the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means (2) privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player; generation means capable of updating and generating a determination value within a predetermined range in the game machine having the judgment value generated by the generation means; obtaining means for obtaining a value; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is obtained by the obtaining means. When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and the dynamic display mode determination means, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination value and the determination result obtained by the acquisition means. When the determination value is a specific determination value, when determining the dynamic display mode of acquisition control means for causing the acquisition means to acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation means, the specific determination value When the determination value is acquired by the acquisition means, the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed at least once during execution of the dynamic display mode determined based on the newly acquired determination value. and temporary stop display means for causing the game machine D1 to stop.

In the gaming machine D1, the temporary stop display means determines the number of temporary stops based on the number of times the specific determination value is acquired when one of the dynamic display modes is determined. A gaming machine D2 characterized by:

The game machine D3 is characterized in that, in the game machine D1 or D2, the specific determination value is set to be large when the determination means determines that the specific determination result is obtained.

In any one of game machines D1 to D3, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means includes the specific determination result and the specific dynamic display mode determined when determined by the determination means. and at least a plurality of normal dynamic display modes that are determined when the result is other than the specific determination result, and the determination value is set for each of the specific dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode is assigned and set in advance.

The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the number of the specific determination values is set so that the rate at which each of the specific dynamic display mode or the normal dynamic display mode is determined is an integer. game machine D5.

<Feature group E> (Common random number acquisition)
When a first generation means for updating and generating a first determination value with a value within a first range and a first condition are met, the first determination value obtained from the first generation means is the specific number. 1 determination value; first control means for executing the first control when the first determination means determines that the specific first determination value; When a second condition different from the first condition is met with a second generation means for updating and generating the second determination value with the value of the second determination value acquired from the second generation means is specified and executing a second control different from the first control when the second determination means determines that the second determination value is the specific second determination value. based on the establishment of either one of the first condition and the second condition, the first determination value and the first judgment value are generated by the first generating means and the second generating means, respectively. and acquisition means for acquiring 2 judgment values.

Here, for example, there is a gaming machine that performs a lottery for a special symbol based on the winning of a game ball into a starting port, and performs a lottery for a normal symbol based on the passage of a game ball through a through gate. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol determination value for performing a special symbol lottery is acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the start opening, and a normal symbol is obtained based on the game ball passing through the through gate. There is a thing that acquires the determination value for the normal design for performing the lottery. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-010910). In this case, it is necessary to change the control process depending on whether the game ball has entered the starting hole or the game ball has passed through the through gate, thus complicating the control process.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the first determination value is updated and generated by the first generation means with a value within the first range. When the first condition is satisfied, the first determination means determines whether the first determination value acquired by the first generation means is the specific first determination value, and the first determination means determines the specific first determination The first control is executed by the first control means when it is determined to be a value. A second determination value is updated and generated by the second generating means with a value within the second range. When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second determination means determines whether the second determination value acquired by the second generation means is a specific second determination value. When the second determination means determines that the second determination value is the specific second determination value, the second control means executes the second control different from the first control. The acquisition means acquires the first determination value and the second determination value from the first generation means and the second generation means, respectively, based on whether one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied.

As a result, the operation of the acquisition means can be made common between when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress complication of control processing. That is, there is an effect that suitable control processing can be executed.

A gaming machine E2 comprising storage means for storing the first judgment value and the second judgment value acquired by the acquisition means in the gaming machine E1 until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition means are stored by the storage means until the predetermined condition is satisfied. The determination by the means and the determination by the second determination means can be executed based on each determination value stored in the storage means. That is, since it is not necessary to make an immediate determination using each determination value acquired by the acquisition means, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the processing order and the like in the control processing can be increased.

The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the first determination means or the second determination means corresponding to the satisfied first condition or second condition is determined. Gaming machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination of the first determining means or the second determining means corresponding to the established first condition or the second condition is executed. It is possible to prevent the first determination value or the second determination value from being discarded before being used for determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress execution of determination based on an abnormal determination value.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first control is control for giving a first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second control is a control that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. 2. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being a control for providing a privilege.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first control performs control for giving a first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second control performs control for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. done.

As a result, the player can play the game in anticipation that the first control or the second control will be executed, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4 is provided with a ball entering means through which a game ball can enter and a passing means through which a game ball can pass, and the first condition is based on the game ball passing through the passing means. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the second condition is established when a game ball enters the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first condition is established based on the game ball passing through the passage means through which the game ball can pass, and the second condition is based on the game ball entering the ball entering means through which the game ball can enter. is established.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize the opportunity for the establishment of the first condition and the second condition. Therefore, every time the player recognizes that the first condition or the second condition is established, the player can expect the first control or the second control to be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

A first detection means for detecting the establishment of the first condition, a second detection means for detecting the establishment of the second condition, and the first detection means and the second detection means in any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5. Based on the detection result, a predetermined condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined control is executed according to the satisfied predetermined condition. and control execution means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the establishment of the first condition is detected by the first detector, and the establishment of the second condition is detected by the second detector. Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, the predetermined condition determination means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. Control according to a predetermined condition is executed by the predetermined control execution means.

As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the predetermined condition is established according to the control contents of the predetermined control execution means.

In the game machine E6, counting means for counting the number of times the first detection means detects the establishment of the first condition, and counting by the counting means based on detection of the establishment of the second condition by the second detection means. and initialization means for initializing a result, wherein the predetermined condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is established when the count result by the counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times. Gaming machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the counting means counts the number of times the first detection means detects that the first condition is met. Then, the initialization means initializes the counting result of the counting means based on the fact that the second condition is detected by the second detection means. When the result of counting by the counting means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether the first condition has been detected continuously for a predetermined number of times or more without the second condition being satisfied, according to the control details of the predetermined control execution means.

a third generation means for generating a third determination value based on the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition means in any one of the game machines E1 to E7; storage control means for storing the generated third judgment value in the storage means until judgment by the first judgment means or the second judgment means corresponding to the satisfied first condition or the second condition is executed; and specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition is established based on the first determination value, the second determination value, and the third determination value stored in the storage means, and by the specific condition determination means A game machine E8, further comprising specific control execution means for executing control based on the specific condition that has been established when it is determined that the specific condition has been established.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third determination value is generated by the third generation means based on the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition means, and the third determination value generated by the third generation means is The data is stored in the storage means by the storage control means until the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means corresponding to the established first condition or the second condition is executed. Based on the first judgment value, the second judgment value, and the third judgment value stored in the storage means, the establishment of the specific condition is judged by the specific condition judgment means, and the establishment of the specific condition is judged by the specific condition judgment means. is determined, control based on the established specific condition is output by the specific control execution means.

As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied according to the content of the control executed by the specific control execution means.

In the gaming machine E8, the specific condition determination means is newly generated by the third generation means based on the third determination value, the first determination value, and the second determination value stored in the storage means. The gaming machine E9 is characterized in that it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied when the third determination value is different from the third determination value.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E8, the third determination value is newly generated by the third generation means based on the third determination value stored in the storage means, the first determination value, and the second determination value. When the third determination value is different from the third determination value, the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not each judgment value is normally updated by the means.

Predetermined determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the second determination value stored in the storage means when the first condition is established in any one of the game machines E1 to E9, and the determination result of the predetermined determination means. and notification means for performing notification based on the game machine E10.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first condition is satisfied, the predetermined determination means makes a predetermined determination based on the second determination value stored in the storage means. Then, based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means, the notification is performed by the notification means.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can easily know the judgment result of the predetermined judgment according to the content of the notification by the notification means.

The game machine E10 includes display means capable of displaying identification information and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means based on the establishment of the second condition. The gaming machine E11 is characterized in that the notifying means displays an effect based on the judgment result of the predetermined judging means during execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means capable of displaying the identification information based on the establishment of the second condition. During execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means, the notifying means displays an effect based on the determination result of the predetermined determining means.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the display mode during execution of the dynamic display, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature F Group> (Batch acquisition possible twice in one interrupt process)
A first generating means for updating and generating the first judgment value with a value within the first range, a second generating means for generating and updating the second judgment value with a value within the second range, and game control processing are repeated. In a game machine having executable control means and interrupt means capable of interrupting the game control process and executing the interrupt process based on a predetermined trigger, the interrupt means satisfies a first condition. a first acquisition means for acquiring the first determination value and the second determination value from the first generation means and the second generation means, respectively, and its A first control means for executing a first control when the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition means is determined to be the specific first determination value, and a second condition different from the first condition. is established, the first second acquisition means for acquiring a determination value and the second determination value; and the first determination value when the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition means is determined to be the specific second determination value. and second control means for executing a second control different from the control.

Here, for example, there is a gaming machine that performs a lottery for a special symbol based on the winning of a game ball into a starting port, and performs a lottery for a normal symbol based on the passage of a game ball through a through gate. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol determination value for performing a special symbol lottery is acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the start opening, and a normal symbol is obtained based on the game ball passing through the through gate. There is a thing that acquires the determination value for the normal design for performing the lottery. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-010910). In this case, it is necessary to change the control process depending on whether the game ball has entered the starting hole or the game ball has passed through the through gate, thus complicating the control process.

On the other hand, in the game machine F1, when the first condition is satisfied in the interrupt means, as one process of interrupt processing, the first generation means and the second generation means generate the first judgment value and the A second determination value is obtained by the first obtaining means. Then, when the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition means is determined to be the specific first determination value, the first control is executed by the first control means. Further, based on the establishment of a second condition that is different from the first condition, the first generation means and the second generation means respectively generate new the updated first determination value and second determination value are obtained by the second obtaining means. The second control different from the first control is executed by the second control means when the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition means is determined to be the specific second determination value.

As a result, since the second acquisition means acquires the newly updated first determination value and second determination value, an independent determination different from the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the first acquisition means value can be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that fairness can be ensured when the second control means determines whether the second determination value is a specific second determination value. That is, there is an effect that suitable control processing can be executed.

In the gaming machine F1, the second generation means updates and generates the second determination value at least between acquisition by the first acquisition means and acquisition by the second acquisition means. Game machine F2.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the second determination value is updated and generated by the second generation means at least between the acquisition by the first acquisition means and the acquisition by the second acquisition means. Therefore, the second determination value obtained based on the establishment of the second condition is a determination value newly updated and generated after the second determination value is obtained by the first obtaining means. Therefore, even if the first acquisition means and the second acquisition means respectively acquire the first determination value and the second determination value in one interrupt process, the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition means The value is an independent judgment value different from the second judgment value acquired by the first acquisition means. As a result, there is an effect that fairness can be ensured when the second control means determines whether the second determination value is a specific second determination value.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the interrupt means, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one of the interrupt processes, obtain by the first obtaining means and obtain by the second obtaining means The game machine F3 is characterized in that the acquisition is executed in the one interrupt process.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interruption process, the interruption means causes the acquisition by the first acquisition means. Since the acquisition by the second acquiring means is executed in one interrupt process, it is possible to determine whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interrupt process. In the processing, the first judgment value and the second judgment value can be acquired based on the establishment of the first condition and the second condition, respectively, so that the acquisition of the first judgment value and the second judgment value can be efficiently performed. There is an effect that it can be done.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first control is control for giving a first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second control is a second control that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. 2. A gaming machine F4 characterized by being a control for providing a privilege.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the first control. Moreover, the second privilege, which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is given by the second control.

As a result, the player can play the game in anticipation that the first control or the second control will be executed, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4 is provided with a ball entering means through which a game ball can enter and a passing means through which a game ball can pass, and the first condition is based on the game ball passing through the passing means. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the second condition is established when a game ball enters the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first condition is established based on the game ball passing through the passing means. Further, the second condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize the opportunity for the establishment of the first condition and the second condition. Therefore, every time the player recognizes that the first condition or the second condition is established, the player can expect the first control or the second control to be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

A game machine Z1, wherein the game machine is a slot machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, F1 to F5, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Characterized game machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a winning lottery for special symbols based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole, and a winning lottery for normal symbols based on the passage of a game ball through a through gate. be. In such a gaming machine, a determination value for performing a winning lottery for special symbols is acquired based on the winning of a game ball into a starting hole, and a winning lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the passing of a game ball through a through gate. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-010910).
However, in such a game machine, there is a risk that the control processing will become complicated.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing suitable control processing.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes first generation means for updating and generating a first determination value with a value within a first range, and when a first condition is satisfied, the first 1 first determination means for determining whether the first determination value acquired from the generation means is the specific first determination value; and the first determination means determines that the first determination value is the specific first determination value a first control means for executing the first control when the first control is performed; a second generating means for generating the second judgment value by updating it with a value within the second range; and a second condition different from the first condition is established. a second determination means for determining whether the second determination value acquired from the second generation means is the specific second determination value, and the specific second determination by the second determination means second control means for executing a second control different from the first control when it is determined to be a value, and one of the first condition and the second condition being satisfied, obtaining means for obtaining the first determination value and the second determination value from the first generation means and the second generation means, respectively.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, further comprising storage means for storing the first judgment value and the second judgment value acquired by the acquisition means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Prepare.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the predetermined condition is the first determining means or the second determining means corresponding to the established first condition or second condition. It holds when the determination is performed.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the first control is control for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player, The second control is a control for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege.
A gaming machine according to Technical Idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Technical Ideas 1 to 4, comprising ball-entering means for allowing game balls to enter and passing means for allowing game balls to pass through, The first condition is established based on the game ball passing through the passing means, and the second condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. be.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the first determination value is updated and generated by the first generating means with a value within the first range. When the first condition is satisfied, the first determination means determines whether the first determination value acquired by the first generation means is the specific first determination value, and the first determination means determines the specific first determination The first control is executed by the first control means when it is determined to be a value. A second determination value is updated and generated by the second generating means with a value within the second range. When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second determination means determines whether the second determination value acquired by the second generation means is a specific second determination value. When the second determination means determines that the second determination value is the specific second determination value, the second control means executes the second control different from the first control. The acquisition means acquires the first determination value and the second determination value from the first generation means and the second generation means, respectively, based on whether one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied.
As a result, there is an effect that suitable control processing can be executed.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the first judgment value and the second judgment value acquired by the acquisition means satisfy a predetermined condition by the storage means. Since the information is stored until it is determined, the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the second determination means can be executed based on each determination value stored in the storage means. That is, since it is not necessary to make an immediate determination using each determination value acquired by the acquisition means, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the processing order and the like in the control processing can be increased.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the predetermined condition is the first determining means or the second determining means corresponding to the established first condition or second condition. Since this is established when the determination by the determining means is executed, it is possible to prevent the first determination value or the second determination value acquired by the acquiring means from being discarded before being used for determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress execution of determination based on an abnormal determination value.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first control performs control for giving a first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second control performs control for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. done.
As a result, the player can play the game in anticipation that the first control or the second control will be executed, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first condition is established based on the game ball passing through the passage means through which the game ball can pass, and the second condition is based on the game ball entering the ball entering means through which the game ball can enter. is established.
As a result, the player can be made to recognize the opportunity for the establishment of the first condition and the second condition. Therefore, every time the player recognizes that the first condition or the second condition is established, the player can expect the first control or the second control to be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
110 main control means (control means, interrupt means)
900 Random number generation IC for special figure (first generation means)
Random number generation IC for 901 normal figure (second generating means)
Part of S215 second control means
S461 second acquisition means
S516, S517, S525 First control means
S661 first acquisition means
Part of S1006 second control means

Claims (1)

a first generation means for updating and generating the first determination value with a value within the first range;
a second generation means for updating and generating the second determination value with a value within the second range;
Control means capable of repeatedly executing game control processing;
In a gaming machine having interrupting means capable of interrupting the game control process and executing the interrupt process based on a predetermined trigger,
The interrupt means
obtaining the first determination value and the second determination value from the first generation means and the second generation means, respectively, as one process of the interruption process based on the establishment of the first condition; 1 obtaining means;
a first control means for executing a first control when it is determined that the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition means is the specific first determination value;
the first generating means and the second generating means as one process of the interrupt process executed after the first obtaining means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition; a second acquiring means for acquiring the first determination value and the second determination value newly updated from
a second control means for executing a second control different from the first control when the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition means is determined to be the specific second determination value; prepared,
The game machine is
a first storage area capable of temporarily storing the acquired first determination value and the second determination value; and storing until the information corresponding to the first judgment value or the second judgment value stored in the first storage area for judging the first judgment value or the second judgment value is judged. and a storage means having a second storage area capable of
After the first determination value or the second determination value is stored in the first storage area, after the newly acquired first determination value and the second determination value are stored, the newly obtained Information corresponding to the first determination value and the second determination value stored before the first determination value and the second determination value are stored in the first storage area is stored in the first storage area. It is configured to be in a non-stored state,
The counter value may be updated when the first determination value and the second determination value are acquired based on the establishment of the second condition, and the corresponding information is stored in the second storage area. have the means to
A game machine capable of executing a predetermined notification when the counter value is a specific value.

Images